owner’s manual - seat uk...owner’s manual toledo 6ja012720bf inglés 6ja012720bf (05.16) toledo...

OWNER’S MANUAL

Toledo

6JA012720BF

Ingl

és 6

JA01

2720

BF

(05

.16)

Tole

do

Ingl

és (

05.1

6)

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.16

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the TOLEDO, some of the equipment and func-tions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the mar-ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

ForewordThis Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully tofamiliarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance ofthe vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa-tion concerning accessories, modificationsand part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-boarddocumentation to the new owner, as itshould be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.

● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”

information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.

● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa-tion concerning the passenger's front air-bag ››› page 73, Important informationregarding the front passenger's airbag.

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsThe essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Interior view (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 44Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 50How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 53

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . . . 61How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 64Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Changing the rear lights (on the side panel) . . 87Changing tail lights (on the rear lid) . . . . . . . . . 89Changing the bulb on the number plate . . . . . . 91

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 99System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 100Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Opening and closing of electric windows . . . . . 115Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Windscreen wipers and windscreen wash-ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Adjusting seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . 127Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 131Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Air conditioning (manual)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . . 147Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 149Brakes and brake servo systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

3

Table of Contents

Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 171cruise speed (Cruise control)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Monitoring system Front Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Tiredness detection (break recommenda-tion)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Towing bracket device for trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Accessories and modifications to the vehi-cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

4

The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 392 ››› page 503 ››› page 11

4 ››› page 95 ››› page 446 ››› page 10

7 ››› page 39

5

The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 402 ››› page 403 ››› page 43

4 ››› page 415 ››› page 406 ››› page 41

7 ››› page 418 ››› page 759 ››› page 45

10 ››› page 137

6

The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 132 ››› page 183 ››› page 194 ››› page 31




17 ››› page 1118 ››› page 1219 ››› page 13

7

The essentials

Interior view (right-hand drive)





17 ››› page 1818 ››› page 4319 ››› page 11

8

The essentials

How it works

Unlocking and locking

Doors

Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.

Fig. 2 Centre console: central locking switch.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using thekey

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Unlocking the rear lid: press the ››› Fig. 1 button until all the turn signals onthe vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-ing switch

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. Thewarning lamp on the button will light up.None of the doors can be opened from theoutside. The doors can be opened from theinside by pulling the inside door handle.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. Thewarning lamp on the button will switch off.

››› in Unlocking and locking the vehicleon page 105

››› page 104

››› page 9, ››› page 10

Unlocking and locking the driver'sdoor

Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

● Unfold the vehicle key shaft.

● Insert the key shaft into the lower openingin the cover on the driver door handle frombelow ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the coverupwards.

● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinderto unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special Characteristics

● The anti-theft alarm will remain active whenvehicles are unlocked. However, it is not trig-gered ››› page 107. »

9

The essentials

● After the driver door is opened, you have15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Oncethis time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.

● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key anddeactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when thevehicle is locked manually using the keyshaft ››› page 107.

Locking manually

Fig. 4 Rear door: manual locking

On the front of a door with no lock cylinderthere is an emergency locking device that isonly visible when the door is open.

Locking

● Remove the cap A ››› Fig. 4.

● Insert the key in the slot B and turn it inthe direction of the arrow until horizontal (onthe other direction on the right-hand door).

● Replace the cap.

Once the door has been locked, it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. The doorcan be opened from the inside by pulling thedoor handle.

Rear lid

Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the releaselever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opensautomatically.

● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of thehandles on the interior lining and close it bypushing gently.

››› in Rear lid on page 114

››› page 113

››› page 10

Manual release of the rear lid

Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to man-ual release.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually frominside in the event of an emergency.

● Insert the key in the opening in the liningof the rear lid and move the key in the direc-tion of the arrow until the lock is released.

10

The essentials

Bonnet

Fig. 7 Unlocking the bonnet.

● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever underthe dashboard ››› Fig. 7 1 .

● Lifting up the bonnet: press the releasecatch under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 7 2 .The arrester hook under the bonnet is re-leased.

● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

››› in Introduction on page 202

››› page 202

Electric windows*

Fig. 8 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.

● Opening the window: Press the button.

● Closing the window: Pull the button.

Buttons on the driver door

Window on the front left door

Window on the front right door

Window on the rear left door

Window on the rear right door

Safety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

››› in Operation of the electric windowson page 115

››› page 115

Before driving

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 9 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forward/back: pull the lever and movethe seat forwards or backwards.

Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.

Tilting the backrest: pull the lever back.


1

2

3

11

The essentials

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 10 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-straint.

Grab the sides of the head restraints withboth hands and push upwards to the desiredposition. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 button on the side.

››› in head restraints on page 128

››› page 59, ››› page 128

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 11 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should-ers, adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should bewell centred over it, never over the neck. Theseat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on theupper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across thepelvis, never across the stomach. The seatbelt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-vis.

››› page 62

››› page 64

12

The essentials

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the frontseats are retracted automatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Service and disposal of belt ten-sioners on page 66

››› page 65

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 13 Detail of the driver door: control forthe exterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knobto the corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver

L/R

side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,right) to the direction desired.

Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.

››› in Exterior mirrors on page 126

››› page 126

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 14 Lever in the lower left side of thesteering column.

Adjusting the position of the steering wheel:Pull the ››› Fig. 14 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-sition on page 57

13

The essentials

Airbags

Front airbags

Fig. 15 Driver airbag in the steering wheeland front passenger airbag in the dash panel

Fig. 16 Airbag covers reacting when the frontairbags are triggered.

The front airbag for the driver is located inthe steering wheel ››› Fig. 15 and the frontpassenger airbag is located in the dash pan-el ››› Fig. 15 . Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 16.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the driver and the frontpassenger additional protection for the headand chest in the event of a severe frontal col-lision.

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occupantputs pressure on the bag. Thus, the head andchest are protected by the airbag. After thecollision, the airbag deflates sufficiently toallow visibility.

››› in Front airbags on page 69

Deactivating the front passenger frontairbagdeactivating the airbag

Fig. 17 Front passenger front airbag switch.

14

The essentials

To deactivate the front passenger front air-bag:

● Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

● Insert the key blade into the slot providedin the deactivation switch.

● Approximately ¾ of the length of the keyblade remains inserted (the maximum).

● Turn the key blade, changing its position to. Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-sure that you have inserted the key as far asit will go.

● Finally, check the control lamp on the in-strument panel where it shows the following should appear .

››› in Front passenger front airbagswitch on page 72

››› page 71

Side airbags*

Fig. 18 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 19 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 18. The locations are identified by thetext “AIRBAG” in the upper region of thebackrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the sideairbag system provides additional protectionfor the upper body in the event of a severeside collision ››› page 61, The whysand wherefores of seat belts.

In a side collision, the side airbags reducethe risk of injury to passengers to the areasof the body facing the impact. In addition tothe normal protection from the front seatbelts, passengers are also held fast in theevent of a side collision, and this is howthese airbags provide maximum protection.

››› in Side airbags* on page 69

15

The essentials

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 20 Location of head-protection airbags.

Fig. 21 Deployed head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 20 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the head

and upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› page 15.

››› in Curtain airbags* on page 70

Child seats

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag

Fig. 22 Passenger's side sun visor: airbagsticker.

Fig. 23 On the rear frame of the passengerside door: airbag sticker.

A sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame.

››› in Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag on page 73

››› page 73

Possible ways to secure child seats

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat orfront passenger seat in the following ways:

● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be securedwith a seat belt.

16

The essentials

● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can befastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO-FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO-FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings››› page 17.

Weightgroup

Seat locations

Front pas-sengera)

Rearouter

Rearcentre

Group 0<10 kg

U* U/L U

Group 0+<13 kg

U* U/L U

Group I9-18 kg

U* U/L U

Group II/III15-36 kg

U* U U

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manu-facturer's instructions is required when using or installing childseats.

Suitable for universal approved restrain-ing systems for use in this age category(universal retention systems are thosefitted using the adult seat belt).

Move the front passenger seat as farback as possible, as high as possibleand always disable the airbag.

Suitable for retention systems using the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* anchors.

U:

*:

L:

The systems include the child restraint sys-tem mounting with an upper retaining strap(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points onthe seat.

››› in Safety instructions on page 74

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seatmounting system*

Fig. 24 ISOFIX securing rings.

Fig. 25 Top Tether* securing ring.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether*system can be secured quickly, easily andsafely on the rear outer seats.

When removing or fitting the child seat,please be sure to follow the manufacturer'sinstructions.

● Move the rear seat as far to the rear as itwill go.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-taining rings until the child seat can be heardto engage. If the child seat is equipped withTop Tether* anchor points, secure it to thecorrespondent ring. Observe the manufactur-er's instructions.

● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is secure.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted oneach rear seat. In some vehicles, the ringsare secured to the seat frame and, in others,they are secured to the rear floor. Access to »

17

The essentials

the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seatbackrest and the seat cushioning. The TopTether* rings are located at the rear of thebackrests of the rear seats (behind the seatbackrest or in the boot).

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Techni-cal Services.

››› in Safety instructions on page 74

Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 26 Ignition key positions.

Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Removethe key from the ignition and turn the wheeluntil it locks. In vehicles with an automaticgearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,press the locking key on the selector leverand release it again.

● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the keyinto the ignition and turn it at the same timeas the steering wheel in the direction indica-ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turnthe steering wheel, it may be because it islocked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glowplugs reheating

● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2

position.

● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1

position.

● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheatwhen the ignition is switched on

Starting the engine

● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal allthe way down and move the gearbox lever in-to neutral.

● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedaland move the selector lever to the P positionor into N.

● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do notpress the accelerator.

Start-Stop System*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal,the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.The ignition remains switched on.


››› page 149

Lights and visibility

Light switch

Fig. 27 Dash panel: light control.

18

The essentials

Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 27.

Sym-bol

Ignition switch-ed off

Ignition is switch-ed on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Light off or daytimedriving light on.

The “Coming home”and “Leavinghome” guide lightsmay be switchedon.

Automatic control ofdipped beam and day-time running light.

Side light on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beam switch-ed on.

Front fog lights: move the switch to thefirst position, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch completelyfrom positions , or .

Switching off fog lights: Push the switch orturn it to the position.


››› page 116

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 28 Turn signal and main beam lever

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal: Right-hand parkinglight (ignition switched off).

Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).

Main beam switched on: Control lamp lit up on the instrument panel.

Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever ispushed. Control lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

››› page 118

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 29 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam

● In an emergency

● The vehicle has broken down

● When towing or being towed

››› page 121

19

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 30 Detail of headliner: version 1

Fig. 31 Detail of headliner: version 2

Knob Function

Switches interior lights off.

Switches interior lights on.

Knob Function

Switches door contact control on (central po-sition).The interior lights come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is unlocked, a door isopened or the key is removed from the igni-tion.The lights go off a few seconds after all thedoors are closed, the vehicle is locked or theignition is switched on.

Turning the reading light on and off

››› page 122

Windscreen wipers and window wiperblade

Fig. 32 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper

More the lever to the required position:

0 Windscreen wiper off.

1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.Using the control ››› Fig. 32 A adjust theinterval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Holdthe lever down for more time to increasethe wipe frequency.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washerfunction is activated by pushing the leverforwards, and simultaneously the wind-screen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwill wipe the window approximately everysix seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is activa-ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wip-er starts simultaneously.


››› page 124

››› page 53

20

The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings (Setup)

Fig. 33 Easy Connect: Main menu Fig. 34 Easy Connect: CAR menu

To select the settings menus, press the EasyConnect button and the Setup functionbutton.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options in these me-nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronicsand equipment.

● Switch the ignition on.

● If the Infotainment System is off, switch iton.

● Press the system's MENU button and thenthe system's ››› Fig. 33 button or but-ton to go to the CAR menu ››› Fig. 34.

● Press the function button Setup to open themenu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 34.

● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button.

When you press the menu button, the last se-lected menu will always be displayed.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing theBACK menus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 154

TyresTyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 219

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 220 »

21

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Driver assistance

Front Assist (ambient trafficmonitoring system) Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 176

City emergency braking func-tion Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. ››› page 180

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 182

Parking and ma-noeuvring ParkPilot Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings,

adjust volume››› page 167

Vehicle lights

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 122

Coming home/Leaving homefunction Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function ››› page 121

Daytime driving light Activation/deactivation ››› page 118

Mirrors/wind‐screen wipers

Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking ››› page 126

Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 124

Opening and clos-ing

Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 104

Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 107

Multifunctiondisplay –

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers,ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speed-ing warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data“total calculation”

››› page 23

Date and time –Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for-mat, set the date, date format

–

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 30

Factory settings –All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir-rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display

–

22

The essentials

››› in CAR menu (Setup) on page 99

››› page 99

Driver information system

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possibleto read the different functions of the displayby scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

The number of menus displayed on the in-strument panel will vary according to the ve-hicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to pro-gramme or modify additional functions, ac-cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, itwill not be possible to read the menus. Somewarning messages can be confirmed andmade to disappear with the windscreen wiper

lever button or the multifunction steeringwheel button.

The information system also provides the fol-lowing information and displays (dependingon the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data ››› page 26■ Vehicle status■ MFD from departure■ MFD from refuelling■ MFD total calculation

Assist systems ››› table on page 24■ Reverse (optional)

Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system

Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-tion system

Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-let Navigation system

Vehicle ››› table on page 24

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

Operating the instrument panel me-nus

Fig. 35 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-tons.

Fig. 36 Right side of multifunction steeringwheel: control buttons.

The driver information system is controlledwith the multifunction steering wheel buttons››› Fig. 36 or with the windscreen wiper lever››› Fig. 35 (if the vehicle is not equipped withmultifunction steering wheel). »

23

The essentials

Enabling the main menu


● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,press button ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreenwiper lever or button on the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 36.

● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-er: to display the main screen ››› page 24 orto return to the main menu from anothermenu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 35

2 .

● If managed from the multifunction steeringwheel: the main menu list is not displayed.To go from point to point in the main menu,press button or several times››› Fig. 36.

Select a submenu

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 on thewindscreen wiper lever up or down or turnthe thumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 36 until the desired option ap-pears marked on the menu.

● The selected option is displayed betweentwo horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle isdisplayed on the right:

● To consult the submenu option, press but-ton ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen wiperlever or button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel ››› Fig. 36.

Making changes according to the menu

● With the rocker switch on the windscreenwiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-function steering wheel, make the desiredchanges. To increase or decrease the valuesmore quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.

● Mark or confirm the selection with button››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen wiper leveror button on the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 36.

Menu

Menu Function

Drivingdata

Information and possible configurationsof the multifunction display (MFD)››› page 26, ››› page 99.

Assistsystems

Information and possible configurationsof the driver assistance systems››› page 99.

Naviga-tion

Information instructions from the activa-ted navigation system: when a route guid-ance is activated, the turning arrows andproximity bars are displayed. The appear-ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys-tem.If route guidance is not activated, the di-rection of travel (compass) and the nameof the street along which you are drivingare shown ››› Booklet Navigation system.

Menu Function

AudioStation display on the radio.Track name on the CD.Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra-dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system.

Tele-phone

Information and possible configurationsof the mobile phone preinstallation››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigationsystem.

Lap tim-er*

In a racing circuit, measurement andmemorisation of lap times by the vehicleand comparison with previously measuredbest times ››› page 28.

Vehiclestatus

Display of the current warning or informa-tion texts and other system components,depending on the equipment››› page 99.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4°C(+39°F), the symbol “ice crystal” (warning ofrisk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, thissymbol flashes and then it remains lit untilthe outside temperature rises above +6°C(+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display onpage 96.

When the vehicle is at a standstill or whentravelling at very low speeds, the tempera-ture displayed may be higher than the true

24

The essentials

outside temperature as a result of the heatproduced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Gear-change indicator

Fig. 37 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-tor (manual gearbox).

A gear change will be recommended if thegear you are in is not the most economicalchoice. If no gear-change is recommended, itmeans that you are already in the most eco-nomical gear.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

The following display symbols ››› Fig. 37mean:

● Change to a higher gear: the suggestedgear appears to the right of the current gearwhen a higher gear is recommended.

● Change to a lower gear: the suggestedgear appears to the left of the current gearwhen a lower gear is recommended.

The gear recommendation may occasionallyskip a gear (2nd 4th).

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*

The display is only visible in tiptronic mode››› page 159.

The following display symbols mean:

● Shifting up a gear

● Shifting down a gear

CAUTION

The gear-change indicator is intended to helpsave fuel, but it is not intended to recom-mend the right gear for all driving situations.In certain situations, only the driver canchoose the correct gear (for instance whenovertaking, driving up a steep gradient ortowing a trailer).

Note

The display disappears from the instrumentpanel when you press the clutch pedal.

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open

Fig. 38 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:front left door open; D: rear right door open(5-door vehicles only).

When the ignition is switched on or whendriving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that areopen will be indicated on the instrument pan-el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-ing to the type of instrument panel fitted. »

25

The essentials

Illustra-tion

Key to ››› Fig. 38

A Do not continue driving!The bonnet is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 202.

B Do not continue driving!The rear lid is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 10.

C, D Do not continue driving!A vehicle door is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 107.

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults in the operation are displayed on thescreen using red and yellow symbols andmessages on the instrument panel display(››› page 32, ››› page 32) and, in some ca-ses, with audible warnings. The display mayvary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warningand control lamps on page 98!Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings.A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correctlevels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn-ing and control lamps on page 99Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.

Submenu Assist systems

Assistsystemsmenu

Function

Front As-sist

Switching the monitoring system onand off ››› page 176.

Fatiguedetection*

Switching the fatigue detection on oroff (pause recommendation)››› page 182.

Driving data

Memory

The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-ent values for the journey and the consump-tion.

Changing between display modes on theMFD

● In vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: Press the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 35.

● Vehicles with a multifunction steeringwheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 36.

Multifunction display memory

The multifunction display is equipped withthree memories that work automatically: MFDfrom departure, MFD from refuelling and MFDtotal calculation. On the screen display, youcan read which memory is currently dis-played.

● Toggle between memories with the ignitionon and the memory displayed: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever

or the button of the multifunction steeringwheel.

26

The essentials

Menu Function

MFD fromdeparture

Display and storage of the values forthe journey and the consumption fromwhen the ignition is switched on towhen it is switched off.If the journey is continued in less than2 hours after the ignition is switchedoff, the new data is added to the dataalready stored in the memory. Thememory will automatically be deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than2 hours.

MFD fromrefuelling

Display and storage of the values forthe journey and the consumption. Byrefuelling, the memory will be erasedautomatically.

MFD totalcalcula-tion

The memory records the values for aspecific number of partial trips, up to atotal of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or9999 km, depending on the model ofinstrument panel. On reaching either ofthese limitsa), the memory is automati-cally erased and starts to count from 0again.

a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.

Erasing a memory manually

● Select the memory that you wish to erase.

● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec-onds.

Personalising the displays

In the Easy Connect system you can adjustwhich of the possible displays of the MFD canbe shown on the instrument panel displaywith the button and the function buttonSetup ››› page 99.

Data summary

Menu Function

Current fuelconsumption

The current fuel consumption dis-play operates throughout the jour-ney, in litres/100 km; and with theengine running and the vehiclestopped, in litres/hour.

Average fuelconsumption

After turning on the ignition, aver-age fuel consumption in li-tres/100 km will be displayed aftertravelling about 100 metres. Other-wise horizontal lines are displayed.The value shown is updated approxi-mately every 5 seconds.ACT®*: Depending on the equip-ment, number of active cylinders.

Operatingrange

Approximate distance in km that canstill be travelled with the fuel re-maining in the tank, assuming thesame style of driving is maintained.This is calculated using the currentfuel consumption.

Menu Function

Travellingtime

This indicates the hours (h) and mi-nutes (min) since the ignition wasswitched on.

Distancecovered

Distance covered in km (m) afterswitching on the ignition.

Averagespeed

The average speed will be shown af-ter a distance of about 100 metreshas been travelled. Otherwise hori-zontal lines are displayed. The valueshown is updated approximately ev-ery 5 seconds.

Digital dis-play ofspeed

Current speed displayed in digitalformat.

Speed warn-ing at ---km/h or Speedwarning at--- mph

If the stored speed is exceeded (be-tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -155 mph), an audible warning isgiven together with a visual warn-ing.

Oil tempera-ture

Updated engine oil temperature dig-ital display

Coolant tem-peraturegauge

Digital display of the current temper-ature of the liquid coolant.

Storing a speed with the speed warning

● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h (--- mph) »

27

The essentials

● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.

● To switch system on: adjust to the desiredspeed within 5 seconds using the rockerswitch on the windscreen wiper lever orby turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-tion steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds.

The speed is stored and the warning activa-ted.

● To switch system off: press the but-ton or . The stored speed is de-leted.

Engine oil temperature display

Vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 untilthe main menu appears. Enter into Drivingdata. With the button 2 move to the oiltemperature gauge.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel

● Enter the submenu Driving data andturn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-ture display appears.

The engine reaches its operating temperaturewhen in normal driving conditions, the oil

temperature is between 80°C (180°F) and120°C (250°F). If the engine is required towork hard and the outside temperature ishigh, the engine oil temperature can in-crease. This does not present any problem aslong as the warning lamps ››› table onpage 33 or ››› table on page 33 do notappear on the display.

Additional electrical appliances

● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 until themain menu appears. Enter into the sectionDriving data. With the rocker switch,move to the display Convenience con-sumers.

● Operation with the multi-function steeringwheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 toDriving data and enter with OK. Turn thethumbwheel to the right until the Conven-ience consumers display appears.

In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-rent sum of all the additional appliances.

Saving tips

Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed inconditions that increase fuel consumption.Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-cations appear automatically only with the ef-

ficiency programme. After a time, the tips willdisappear automatically.

If you wish to hide a saving tip immediatelyafter it appears, press any button on thewindscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-ing wheel*.

Note

● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-ter you switch the ignition on again.

● The saving tips do not appear in all situa-tions, but rather with a large separation oftime.

Timer*

You can access the timer via the selectionmenu ››› page 24.

It allows you to manually time lap times on aracing circuit, memorise them and comparethem to the vehicle's previous best times.

The following menus can be displayed:

● Stop● Lap● Pause● Partial time● Statistics

28

The essentials

Change from one menu to another

● Vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: press the rocker switch in thewindscreen wiper lever.

● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:press or .

Menu “Stop”

Start

The timer starts.If there are existing laps and they are in-cluded in the statistics, it will begin withthe number of laps in question.It is only possible to begin with a new firstlap if the statistics have been reset first inthe Statistics menu.

Sincestart

The timer begins when the vehicle setsoff.If the vehicle is already moving, the timerbegins once the vehicle has stopped.

Statis-tics

The Statistics menu is displayed onthe screen.

Menu “Lap”

New lapThe timer of the current lap stops and anew lap starts immediately. The time forthe lap you have just completed is inclu-ded in the statistics.

Partialtime

For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-played. The timer continues in parallel.

StopThe current lap timer will be interrupted.The lap does not end. The Pause menu isdisplayed.

Menu “Pause”

Continue The interrupted timer continues.

New lap A new timer starts. The halted lap endsand is included in the statistics.

Interr.lap

The timer of the current lap ends and iscancelled. It is not included in the statis-tics.

End The current timer ends. The lap is inclu-ded in the statistics.

Menu “Partial time”

Partialtime

For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-played. The timer continues in parallel.

New lapThe timer of the current lap stops and anew lap starts immediately. The time forthe lap you have just completed is inclu-ded in the statistics.

StopThe current lap timer will be interrupted.The lap does not end. The Pause menu isdisplayed.

Menu “Long-term statistics”

View of the latest lap times:– total time– best lap time– worst lap time– average lap durationA maximum of 10 laps is possible, and atotal duration of 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds.If one of the 2 limits is reached, you willhave to reset the statistics in order to be-gin a new timer.

Back This returns to the previous menu.

Reset-ting tozero

All the memorised statistical data are re-set.

WARNING

Do your best to avoid handling the timerwhile driving.

● Only set the timer or consult statisticswhen the vehicle is stationary.

● While driving, do not handle the timer incomplicated driving situations.

Speed warning device

The speed warning device warns the driverwhen they have exceeded the pre-set speedlimit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warningsignal sounds, and the warning lamp and »

29

The essentials

the driver message Speed limit excee-ded! will be displayed simultaneously on theinstrument panel. The warning lamp switches off when reducing speed below thestored maximum limit.

Speed warning programming is recommen-ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-mum speed, such as when travelling in acountry with different speed limits or for amaximum speed for winter tyres.

Setting speed limit warning

You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* toset, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.

● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP

> control button Driver Assistant >Speed warning.

● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but-ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >Driver assistant > Speed warning.

The warning limit can be set from 30 to240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustmentis made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.

Note

● Please bear in mind that, even with thespeed warning function, it is still importantto keep an eye on the vehicle speed with thespeedometer and to observe the legal speedlimits.

● The speed limit warning function in the ver-sion for some countries warns you at a speedof 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-setspeed limit.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 110 3 .

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) andservices without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established by timeor mileage, the service intervals are alreadypre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this change(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions ofuse and individual driving styles are consid-ered. The advance warning first appears 20days before the date established for the cor-responding service. The kilometres (miles)remaining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)and the time is given in complete days. Thecurrent service message cannot be viewed

until 500 km after the last service. Prior tothis, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, whenthe ignition is switched on a Service remind-er is displayed.

Vehicles without text messages: a span-ner will be displayed on the instrumentpanel plus an indication in km.

The kilometres indicated are the maximumnumber of kilometres that can be travelleduntil the next service. After a few seconds,the display mode changes. A clock symbolappears and the number of days until thenext service is due.

Vehicles with text messages: Service in--- km or --- days will be shown on theinstrument panel display.

Service due

When the service date is due, an audiblewarning is given when the ignition is switch-ed on and the spanner displayed on thescreen flashes for a few seconds.

Vehicles with text messages: Service nowwill be shown on the instrument panel dis-play.

30

The essentials

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Press and hold the button 4 for more than 5seconds to consult the service message.

When the service date has passed, a minussign is displayed in front of the number of kil-ometres or days.

Vehicles with text messages: Servicesince --- km or --- days ago.will beshown on the display.

The time can also be set via the key andSetup function button in the Easy Connect

system ››› page 99.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-ton ››› Fig. 110 4 .

● Switch ignition back on.

● Release THE 4 ››› Fig. 110 button andpress it again for the next 20 seconds.

Note

● The service message disappears after a fewseconds, when the engine is started or when

OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiperlever, or OK on the multifunction steeringwheel.

● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnected fora long period of time, it is not possible to cal-culate the date of the next service. Thereforethe service interval display may not be cor-rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximumservice intervals permitted in the ››› Book-let Maintenance Programme.

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system(CCS)*

Fig. 39 On the left of the steering column:switches and controls for operating the CCS

● Switching on the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 39 1 to . The system is on. If nospeed has been programmed, the system willnot control it.

● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 392 in the area. The current speed is

memorised and controlled.

● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Moveswitch ››› Fig. 39 1 to or push thebrake. The cruise control system is switchedoff temporarily.

● Reactivating the CCS: Press button››› Fig. 39 2 in . The memorised speedis saved and controlled again.

● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac-celerates until the new stored speed.

● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in to lower thespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduceduntil reaching the new stored speed.

● Switching off the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 39 1 to . The system is disconnec-ted and the memorised speed is deleted.


››› page 174

31

The essentials

Warning lamps

On the instrument panel

Fig. 40 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Red warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additionalinformation on the instrument pan-el display

–

Parking brake on. ››› page 154››› page 153

Do not continue driving!The brake fluid level is too low orthere is a fault in the brake system.

Lit up or flashing: Do not continue driving!Fault in the steering.

››› page 150

Driver or passenger has not fas-tened seat belt.

››› page 61

Use the foot brake!

Yellow warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additionalinformation on the instrument pan-el display

–

32

The essentials

Front brake pads worn.

››› page 154

it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis-connection caused by the system.

flashes: ESC or ASR activated.

ASR manually deactivated.

ABS faulty or does not work.

Rear fog light switched on.››› page 18

lights up or flashes: fault in theemission control system.

››› page 164

it lights up: pre-heating of dieselengine. ››› page

165flashes: fault in the diesel enginemanagement.

fault in the petrol engine manage-ment.

››› page 165

lights up or flashes: fault in thesteering system.

››› page 150

Tyre pressure too low, or fault inthe tyre pressure monitoring sys-tem.

››› page 219

Fuel tank almost empty.››› page 98

Fault in airbag system and seatbelt tensioners.

››› page 66

Other warning lamps

Left or right turn signal.

››› page 19

Hazard warning lights on.››› page 121

Trailer turn signals››› page 184

it lights up: Press the foot brake!flashes: the selector lever lockingbutton has not engaged.

››› page 157

it lights up: cruise control activatedor speed limiter switched on andactive. ››› page

31flashes: the speed set by thespeed limiter has been exceeded.

Main beam on or flasher on.››› page 19

On the instrument panel display

Fig. 41 On the instrument panel display: dooropen.

Do not continue driving!With the corresponding indica-tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnetopen or not properly closed.

››› page 25

Ignition: Do not carry on driv-ing! Engine coolant level too low,coolant temperature too high ››› page

208Flashing: Fault in the enginecoolant system.

Do not continue driving!Engine oil pressure too low.

››› page 205 »

33

The essentials

Fault in the battery.››› page 212

Driving light totally or partiallyfaulty.

››› page 83

Fault in the cornering light sys-tem.

››› page 116

Diesel particulate filter blocked››› page 164

Level of windscreen washer fluidtoo low.

››› page 210

Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-tection. Control manually. ››› page

205Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.

Fault in the gearbox.››› page 160

Immobiliser active.››› page 150

Service interval display››› page 30

Mobile telephone is connectedvia Bluetooth to the original tele-phone device.

››› Book-let Radioor››› Book-let Navi-gationsystem

Mobile telephone battery chargemeter. Available only for devicespre-installed in factory.

Freezing warning. The outsidetemperature is lower than +4°C(+39°F).

››› page 24

Start-Stop system activated. ››› page 181

Start-Stop system unavailable.

Low consumption driving status››› page 24

On the instrument panel

Front passenger front airbag isdisabled ( ).

››› page 66

››› in Warning and control lamps onpage 98

››› page 98

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 42 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 42.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.

● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itupwards, move it to the left as far as it will goand then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 42R .

34

The essentials

● Release the clutch.

››› in Changing gears on page 157

››› page 156

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 43 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-sitions.

Parking lock

Reverse gear

P

R

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Sport programme: drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) togo down a gear.

››› in Basic information on page 157

››› page 157

››› page 35

Manual release of selector lever

Fig. 44 Manual release of the selector lever.

N

D

S

+/–

If there is a fault in the power system to theelectronic selector lever lock system (flat bat-tery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty,the selector lever cannot be moved from po-sition P in the normal manner, which pre-vents the vehicle from being moved. The se-lector lever must be unlocked using the man-ual release.

● Apply the handbrake.

● Pull gently on both sides at the front of theselector lever cover.

● Also loosen the cover at the rear.

● Press the yellow plastic part with your fin-ger in the direction indicated by the arrow››› Fig. 44.

● Press the interlock button on the selectorlever knob at the same time and move the se-lector lever to position N (if the selector leveris moved back to position P, it will lockagain).

35

The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 45 In the centre console: Climatronic con-trols

Buttons/controls

Interior temperature setting

Display

Selected interior temperature

Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit

Automatic air conditioning mode

Defrost or demist windscreen

Air flow direction

Air recirculation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Cooling on/off

Selected blower speed

Buttons/controls

Set blower speed

Interior temperature sensor

Defrost or demist windscreen

Automatic mode

Air distribution to windows

Air distribution to upper body

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Air distribution to footwells

Air recirculation

Cooling on/off

››› in General notes on page 142

››› page 147

16

17

18

36

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* work?

Fig. 46 In the centre console: Manual air con-ditioning controls

Temperature

Blower

Air distribution

– Air distribution towards the wind-screen in order to demist or defrost.

– Air distribution to upper body.

– Air distribution to footwell

– Air distribution to the windscreenand the footwell.

Air recirculation

A

B

C

1

A/C: Switching the cooling system on2

Basic positionsControl position Button

Air vents 4A B C 1 2

Windscreen and side window de-frost or demist

Full right 3 or 4 Switched offSwitched on automati-

callya)Open and direct towards the

side window

Mild heatingRequired tempera-

ture2 or 3 / Do not switch on Do not switch on Opening

Cool as quickly as possibleAnti-clockwise as far

as it will goBriefly 4, then 2

or 3 It is switched on au-

tomaticallyb) Switched on Opening

Optimum coolingRequired tempera-

ture1 or 2 Do not switch on Switched on

Open and direct towards theroof

Fresh air mode - blowerAnti-clockwise as far

as it will goRequired position Do not switch on Switched off Opening

a) The lamp in button 2 lights up, even if not all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as available once all of the conditions are met ››› page 145, Generalnotes.b) In certain conditions, air recirculation mode can switch on automatically ››› page 146, a lamp illuminates in the button. »

37

The essentials


››› page 145

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 47 In the centre console: heating systemand fresh air controls.

Temperature

Blower

Air distribution

– Air distribution towards the wind-screen in order to demist or defrost.

– Air distribution to upper body.

– Air distribution to footwell

– Air distribution to the windscreenand the footwell.

Air recirculation

A

B

C

1

Basic positionsControl position

Button 1 Air vents 4A B C

Windscreen and side window de-frost or demist

Full right 3 or 4 Switched offOpen and direct towards the

side window

Mild heating Required temperature 2 or 3 / Do not switch on Opening

Fresh air mode - blowerAnti-clockwise as far as it

will goRequired position Do not switch on Opening

38

The essentials


››› page 144

Fluid Level control

Filling capacities

Capacities

Fuel tank55 litres, of which 7 litres actas reserve.

Windscreen washer flu-id container in versionwithout headlight wash-er

3.5 litres

Windscreen washer flu-id container in versionswith headlight washer

5.4 litres

Fuel

Fig. 48 Vehicle as seen from the rear right:fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank un-screwed cap attached.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

Opening the fuel tank cap

● Press the fuel tank flap in the direction ofthe arrow 1 ››› Fig. 48 A and open it in thedirection of the arrow 2 .

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

● Rest it on the upper part of the fuel tankflap ››› Fig. 48 B.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.

● Close the lid.

››› in Refuelling on page 200

››› page 199

39

The essentials

Oil

Fig. 49 Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 50 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-ted in the engine compartment››› page 205.

The oil should leave a mark between zonesA and C . It should never exceed zone A .

● Zone A : Do not add oil.

● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.

● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .

Topping up engine oil

● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 50.

● Add oil slowly.

● At the same time, check the level to ensureyou do not add too much.

● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Oil properties

Engine type Specification

Petrol without flexible serv-ice interval

VW 502 00/VW 504 00

Petrol with flexible serviceinterval (LongLife)

VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines without Par-ticulate filter (DPF)

VW 505 01/VW 50601/VW 507 00

Diesel. Particulate Filter En-gines (DPF).With or without flexibleservice interval (with andwithout LongLife)a)

VW 507 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage theengine.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

››› page 205

Coolant

Fig. 51 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 205.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolantwhen the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture of

40

The essentials

water and at least 40 % of the additive G13(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives thenecessary frost protection down to -25°C(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts ofthe engine cooling system against corrosion.It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percentageof additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theG13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain optimal anti-corro-sion protection. The mixture of G13 with G12plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly re-duce anti-corrosion protection and shouldtherefore be avoided.

››› in Topping up the coolant level onpage 209

››› page 208

Brake fluid

Fig. 52 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 205.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-cal Service.

››› in Checking brake fluid level onpage 210

››› page 209

Windscreen washer

Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: wind-screen washer reservoir top.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment ››› page 205.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› page 210

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment ››› page 205. It does not requiremaintenance. It is checked as part of the In-spection Service. »

41

The essentials


››› page 211

42

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 54 On the driver-side dash panel: fusebox cover

Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover

Underneath the instrument panel

● Carefully tilt the cover in the direction indi-cated by the arrow and remove it ››› Fig. 54.

● After changing the fuse, replace the coveron the dash panel in the direction oppositethat is indicated by the arrow so that the cov-er tabs fit into the slots on the dash panel.Subsequently, press down on the cover toclose.

In the engine compartment

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse boxcover ››› Fig. 55.

Identifying fuses situated below the dashpanel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40


››› page 80

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 56 Image of a blown fuse

Preparation

● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-trical equipment.

● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 81.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 56.

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown. »

43

The essentials

To replace a fuse

● Remove the fuse.

● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and cannot be replaced. Ifthe headlight becomes damaged, go to aspecialised workshop.

Below, the light source used for all functionsis broken down.

Halogen headlights Type

Daytime running light/sidelight

P21W SLL

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear bulb light Type

Brake light/tail light P21/5W

Side lightsP21/5W (side panel)R5W (rear lid)

Turn signal PY21W

Retro fog light P21W

Reverse lights P21W

LED rear lights Type

Turn signal PY21W

Retro fog light P21W

Reverse lights P21W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

Action in the event of a punc-ture

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surfaceand in a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.

● Apply the handbrake.

● Switch on the hazard warning lights.

● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.

● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector leverto position P.

● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.

● Have the vehicle tool kit* ››› page 75and the spare wheel ››› page 218 ready.

● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING

● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.

● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the car witha stone or similar to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

44

The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-ture kit

Fig. 57 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under thefloor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre

● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 57 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.

● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 57 10 .

● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 57 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.

● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 57 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,fill the tyre with the contents of the sealantbottle.

● Remove the bottle from the valve.

● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 57 1 .

Inflating the tyre

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 57 5 into the tyre valve.

● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 57 7 .

● Start the engine and leave it running.

● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 57 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 134.

● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFFswitch ››› Fig. 57 8 .

● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). a maximum of 8minutes.

● Disconnect the air compressor.

● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.

● Repeat the inflation process.

● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).

● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 78.

››› in TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre Mobi-lity System)* on page 77

››› page 76

45

The essentials

Changing a wheel

Vehicle tool kit*

Fig. 58 Vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit and the jack are stored ina box on the spare wheel or in the sparewheel well. There is also enough space forthe towing bracket ball coupling. The box isstrapped to the spare wheel with tape.

The vehicle tool kit includes the followingparts (depending on equipment):

Screwdriver

Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts

Towline anchorage

Wire hook for removing hub caps

Jack

Box spanner for wheel bolts

Clip for wheel bolt cover

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Spare set of bulbs

Before stowing the jack again, screw downthe arm as far as it will go.

››› in What to do first on page 44

››› page 75

Wheel cover

Fig. 59 Remove the wheel cover.

Removing

● Place the hook from the vehicle tool kit* onthe reinforced edge of the wheel trim.

● Insert the box spanner through the hook,supporting it on the tyre and remove thewheel trim.

8 Fitting

● Press the wheel trim onto the wheel at thecut out designed for the valve.

● Press the wheel trim on both sides in thedirection of the valve so that it fits correctlyin place around all the perimeter.

CAUTION

● Press down by hand, do not hit the wheeltrim! Knocking it sharply, particularly atpoints where the wheel trim has not yet beeninserted, could result in damage to the wheeltrim guiding and centring elements.

● Before fitting the trim on a steel wheel at-tached with an anti-theft wheel bolt, makesure the bolt is in the hole in the valve area››› page 47, Anti-theft wheel bolts*.

● Where trim is fitted at a later date, ensureenough air inflow is guaranteed in order tocool the brake system.

46

The essentials

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 60 Pull off the wheel bolt cap.

Removing

● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over thecap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 60.

● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Fitting

● Insert the caps as far as they will go overthe wheel bolts.

The wheel bolt caps are stored in a box onthe spare wheel or in the spare wheel well.

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

Fig. 61 Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter.

Anti-theft wheel bolts (one bolt per wheel)can only be loosened or tightened using afactory-supplied adapter.

● Pull off the hub cap or bolt cover.

● Insert the adapter B ››› Fig. 61 with itstoothed side as far as it will go on the interiortoothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt A sothat only the outer hexagonal is protruding.

● Fit the box spanner as far as it will go overadapter B .

● Loosen or firmly tighten the wheel bolt››› page 47.

● After removing the adapter, replace the hubcap or the anti-theft wheel bolt cover.

● Check the tightening torque as soon aspossible with a torque wrench.

Note down the code number stamped on thefront of the adapter or of the anti-theft wheelbolt. You will need this number to obtain aspare adapter from the SEAT original acces-sories programme.

You should always have a wheel bolt adapteras part of your vehicle tools.

Loosening and tightening wheel bolts

Fig. 62 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheelbolts.

Loosening wheel bolts

● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel boltas far as it will go1). »

1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrewor tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47.

47

The essentials

● Grip the end of the box spanner and turnthe wheel bolt about one turn anti-clockwise››› Fig. 62.

Tightening wheel bolts

● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel boltas far as it will go1).

● Grip the box spanner as close to the end aspossible and tighten the bolt firmly by turn-ing clockwise.

WARNING

The wheel bolts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!

Lifting the vehicle

Fig. 63 Changing a wheel: jack positionpoints.

Fig. 64 Fitting the jack.

To place the jack, locate the jacking point un-der the door sill closest to the wheel to bechanged ››› Fig. 63. The jacking point is un-derneath the stamp on the door sill.

● Raise the jack, turning the crank handle towind it up under the jacking point until itsclaw is directly below the jacking point of thedoor sill.

1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrewor tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47.

48

The essentials

● Adjust the jack so that its claw surroundsthe jacking point on the door sill ››› Fig. 64 - Bunderneath the stamp.

● Make sure that the base of the jack is en-tirely supported on a flat surface and that it isvertical ››› Fig. 64 to the point where the clawsurrounds the jacking point on the door sill.

● Continue to wind up the jack using thecrank handle until the defective wheel isclear off the ground.

Removing and fitting a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelbolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel

● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.

● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotationdirection, observe the instructions in››› page 49.

● Mount the wheel.

● Screw on the wheel bolts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.

● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairsusing the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-tation

A directional tread pattern can be identifiedby the arrows on the sidewall that point inthe direction of rotation. Always observe thedirection of rotation indicated when fittingthe wheel to guarantee optimum propertiesof this type of tyres with regard to grip,noises, wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the sparetyre* against the direction of rotation, drivewith care as this means the tyre does not of-fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-ticular importance when the road surface iswet.

Replace the punctured tyre as soon as possi-ble and restore the obligatory and correct di-rection of rotation of all tyres.

Subsequent work

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap››› page 46.

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.

● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in theluggage compartment ››› page 137.

● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.

● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-cator, adjust the pressure and store it inmemory ››› page 219.

● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-while, drive carefully.

● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on thefront wheels. »

49

The essentials

In winter road conditions, snow chains notonly help to improve grip but also improvethe braking capacity.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used on tyres with the following wheelrim/tyre combinations.

Rim size Rim offset Tyre size

5J x 14a) 35 mm 175/70

6J x 15b) 38 mm 185/60

6J x 15b) 38 mm 195/55

a) Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greaterthan 9 mm.b) Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greaterthan 13 mm.

Remove the wheel trims before fitting snowchains.

CAUTION

Chains must be removed when roads are freeof snow. Otherwise they will impair handling,damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.

Emergency towing of the vehi-cle

Towing

Fig. 65 Right side of the front bumper: tow-line anchorage screwed in.

Fig. 66 Right side of the rear bumper: Towingring.

Towline anchorages

● Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-rages.

It is located with the vehicle's tools››› page 75.

● Screw the front towline anchorage into thescrew connection ››› Fig. 65 and tighten itwith the wheel brace.

The rear towline anchorage is under the rearbumper, on the right ››› Fig. 66.

Tow rope or tow bar

The tow bar offers increased safety and alower risk of damage.

The tow rope is recommended when there isno tow bar. It must be elastic so that it doesnot damage the vehicle.

50

The essentials

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

● The tow rope must be taut before you driveoff.

● Release the clutch very carefully when start-ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-ate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especiallywhen using a tow rope. Both drivers shouldrealise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-experienced drivers should not attempt totow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-ways a risk of overloading and damaging theanchorage points.

The towline anchorages are located underthe floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig-nals, windscreen wipers and windscreenwasher can work. Ensure that the steeringwheel is unlocked and moves freely.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicleswith a manual gearbox. With an automaticgearbox, place the lever in N.

To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. Thebrake servo does not work when the engineis switched off.

The power steering only works when the igni-tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,provided that the battery is sufficiently charg-ed. Otherwise, it will need more force.

Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at alltimes.

››› page 78

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting itusing the battery of another vehicle››› page 51. You should only attempt to tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery doesnot work. This is done by leveraging wheelmovement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter thecatalytic converter.

● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.

● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.


● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.

● As soon as the engine has started, pressthe clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Both batteries need to have nominal voltageof 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the back-up bat-tery should not be notably less than thedrained battery.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Jump leads

Positive cable – usually red

Negative cable – usually black

WARNING

● A flat battery can also freeze at tempera-tures slightly below to 0°C (32°F). Do not at-tempt to start the vehicle with a frozen bat-tery. Risk of explosion! »

51

The essentials

● Please note the safety warnings referring toworking in the engine compartment››› page 202.

● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Addi-tionally, the jump lead attached to the posi-tive battery terminal must not touch metalparts of the vehicle. Risk of short circuit!

● Do not connect the negative lead to thenegative terminal of the discharged battery.In the event of sparks when starting the en-gine, the explosive gas given off by the bat-tery could catch fire.

● Position the jump leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with any mov-ing parts in the engine compartment.

● Do not bend over the battery. Risk of acidburns!

● The screw plugs on the battery cells mustbe screwed in firmly.

● Keep sources of fire (flames, lit cigarettes,etc.) away from the battery. - Risk of explo-sion!

● Never use the jump leads on batteries inwhich the electrolyte level is too low. Risk ofexplosion and acid burns.

Note

● The vehicles must not touch each other, aselectricity could flow as soon as the positiveterminals are connected.

● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the vehicle electrical system.

● The jump leads should be checked in a spe-cialist vehicle battery shop.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 67 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start Stop system

Fig. 68 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 67.

3. Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump lead tothe negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 67.

– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-nect one end of the black jump lead X to asuitable ground terminal, to a solid piece ofmetal in the engine block, or to the engineblock itself ››› Fig. 68.

5. Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component boltedto the engine block or to the engine blockitself of the vehicle with the flat battery.Do not connect it to a point near the bat-tery A .

6. Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

52

The essentials

Starting

7. Start the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flatbattery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes untilthe engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switchoff the dipped beam headlights if they areswitched on.

10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rearwindow in the vehicle with the flat battery.This helps minimise voltage peaks whichare generated when the leads are discon-nected.

11.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery termi-nals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the start-er after about 10 seconds and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING

● Please note the safety warnings referring toworking in the engine compartment››› page 202.

● The battery providing assistance must havethe same voltage as the flat battery (12V) andapproximately the same capacity (see imprinton battery). Failure to comply could result inan explosion.

● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-ter the battery has thawed, battery acid couldleak and cause chemical burns. If a batteryfreezes, it should be replaced.

● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettesaway from batteries, danger of explosion.Failure to comply could result in an explo-sion.

● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.

● Do not connect the negative cable from theother vehicle directly to the negative terminalof the flat battery. The gas emitted from thebattery could be ignited by sparks. Danger ofexplosion.

● Do not attach the negative cable from theother vehicle to parts of the fuel system or tothe brake line.

● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-erwise electricity could flow as soon as thepositive terminals are connected.

Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Changing the wiper blades

Fig. 69 Windscreen wiper blades.

Set the windscreen wiper arms to the serviceposition before changing the blades. »

53

The essentials

Service position

● Close the bonnet.

● Switch the ignition on and off.

● Press the lever to position 4

››› Fig. 140 ››› page 125, the wind-screen wiper arms are set to the service posi-tion.

Taking off the wiper blade

● Lift the windscreen wiper arm away fromthe glass moving the blade slightly in the di-rection of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 69.

● Hold the top of the windscreen wiper armwith one hand.

● Unlock the catch 1 with the other handand remove the blade in the direction of ar-row B .

Fitting the wiper blade

● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi-tion.

● Check that the wiper is correctly secured.

● Fold the windscreen wiper arm back downonto the glass.

● Switch the ignition on and press the leverto position 4 ››› Fig. 140››› page 125, the windscreen wiper armsare set to the basic position.

Changing the rear window wiperblade*

Fig. 70 Rear window wiper blade.

Taking off the wiper blade

● Lift the rear window wiper arm away fromthe glass moving the blade slightly in the di-rection of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 70.

● Hold the top of the rear window wiper armwith one hand.

● Unlock the catch 1 with the other handand remove the blade in the direction of ar-row B .

Fitting the wiper blade

● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi-tion.

● Check that the wiper is correctly secured.

● Fold the rear window wiper arm back downonto the glass.

54

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information,tips, suggestions and warnings that youshould read and consider for both your ownsafety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle, bothfor the driver and the passengers. The othersections of the on-board documentation alsocontain further information that you shouldbe aware of for your own safety and for thesafety of your passengers.

● Ensure that the on-board documentation iskept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-cially important when lending or selling thevehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before starting every trip

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 137.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-rors properly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the head restraints inthe in-use position ››› page 59.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 72.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position. ››› page 56.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly. ››› page 61.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, takebreaks regularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip,the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

55

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

risk of injury. The following list includes mostof the safety equipment in your SEAT:

● Three-point seat belts

● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,

● Belt tensioners for the front seats

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats

● Front airbags

● Side airbags in the front seat backrests

● Side airbags in the rear seat backrests*

● Head-protection airbags

● Active front head restraints*

● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats inthe rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,

● Height-adjustable front head restraints

● Rear head restraints with in-use positionand non-use position

● Adjustable steering column

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position for passengers

Correct sitting position for driver

Fig. 71 The proper distance between driverand steering wheel

Fig. 72 Correct head restraint position for thedriver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-

mend the following adjustments for the driv-er:

– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm between thesteering wheel and the centre of your chest››› Fig. 71.

– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-wards so that you are able to press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals to thefloor with your knees still slightly angled››› .

– Ensure that you can reach the highest pointof the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› Fig. 72.

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.

– Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat››› page 11.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the drivercan lead to severe injuries.

56

Safe driving

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between the centre ofthe chest and the centre of the steeringwheel ››› Fig. 71. If you are sitting closer than25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect youproperly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.This reduces the risk of injury when the driverairbag is triggered.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.in the centre of the steering wheel). In suchcases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverduring sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-cident, never drive with the backrest tilted farback! The airbag system and seat belts canonly provide optimal protection when thebackrest is in an upright position and thedriver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-ly.

● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Read the additional information carefully››› page 13.

WARNING

● Never adjust the position of the steeringwheel when the vehicle is moving, as thiscould cause an accident.

● Move the lever up firmly so the steeringwheel position does not accidentally changeduring driving. risk of accident!

● Make sure you are capable of reaching andfirmly holding the upper part of the steeringwheel: risk of accident!

● If you adjust the steering wheel so that itpoints towards your face, the driver airbagwill not protect you properly in the event ofan accident. Make sure that the steeringwheel points towards your chest.

Correct sitting position for front pas-senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the frontpassenger:

– Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible ››› .

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› page 59.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the front passenger seat.


It is possible to deactivate the front passen-ger airbag in exceptional circumstances››› page 71.

Adjusting the front passenger seat››› page 11.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the frontpassenger can lead to severe injuries.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so thatthere is at least 25 cm between your chestand the dash panel. If you are sitting closerthan 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protectyou properly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary. »

57

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whenthe vehicle is moving; never rest them on thedash panel, out the window or on the seat. Anincorrect sitting position exposes you to anincreased risk of injury in case of a suddenbraking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-gered, you could sustain severe injuries dueto an incorrect sitting position.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-senger in events such as sudden braking ma-noeuvres or an accident, never travel with thebackrest tilted far back! The airbag systemand seat belts can only provide optimal pro-tection when the backrest is in an upright po-sition and the front passenger is wearing hisor her seat belt properly. The further the seatbackrests are tilted to the rear, the greaterthe risk of injury due to incorrect positioningof the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-sition!

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear seatpassengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of asudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,passengers on the rear seat bench must con-sider the following:

– Sit up straight.

– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 59.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the rear seat.


– Use an appropriate child restraint systemwhen you take children in the vehicle››› page 72.

WARNING

● If the passengers in the rear seats are notsitting properly, they could sustain severe in-juries.

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-tion when seat backrests are in an uprightposition and the vehicle occupants are wear-ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers Inthe rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-tioning of the seat belt increases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly when the belt webs are properly posi-tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-tially reduce the protective function of seatbelts and increase the risk of injury due to in-correct seat belt position. As the driver, youare responsible for all passengers, especiallychildren.

– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while travel-ling ››› .

The following list contains examples of sit-ting positions that could be dangerous for allvehicle occupants. The list is not complete,but we would like to make you aware of thisissue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

● Never stand in the vehicle.

● Never stand on the seats.

● Never kneel on the seats.

● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

● Never lean against the dash panel.

● Never lie on the rear bench.

● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

● Never sit sideways.

● Never lean out of a window.

● Never put your feet out of a window.

● Never put your feet on the dash panel.

● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-well.

● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-gage compartment.

58

Safe driving

WARNING

● Any incorrect sitting position increases therisk of severe injuries.

● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes thevehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbagsare triggered, by striking a vehicle occupantwho has assumed an incorrect sitting posi-tion.

● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-er sitting position and maintain it throughoutthe trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-sition during the trip ››› page 56, Correct posi-tion for passengers.

Correct adjustment of front head re-straints

Fig. 73 Correctly adjusted head restraint asviewed from the front and the side.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accidentsituations.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-el as the top of your head, or at the veryleast, at eye level ››› Fig. 73.

Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 128

Active head restraints*

Vehicle occupants are pressed into theirseats during a rear end collision. The result-ing body pressure on the seat backrest acti-vates the active head restraint* on the frontseat, which moves rapidly forwards and up-wards at the same time. This movement re-duces the distance between the occupant'shead and the head restraint, thus reducingthe risk of injuries such as whiplash.

WARNING

● Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries. An improper adjustment ofthe head restraints may cause death in an ac-cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-pected manoeuvres.

● The head restraints must always be adjus-ted according to the height of the passenger.

Note

The active head restraints* could also be trig-gered if a vehicle occupant applies a high lev-el of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by“falling” back into the seat when entering thevehicle) or if pressure is applied to a frontseat head restraint from the rear. This acci-dental activation is, however, not dangerous,as the active head restraints will return to theoriginal position immediately and are thusonce again ready.

Correct adjustment of rear head re-straints

Fig. 74 Head restraints in the correct posi-tion.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accidentsituations. »

59

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Rear outer seat head restraints

– The rear outer seat head restraints have 4positions.

– Three positions for use ››› Fig. 74. In thesepositions, the head restraints are used nor-mally, and along with the rear seat belts,protect passengers in the rear seats.

– And one position for non-use.

– To fit the head restraints in position for use,pull on the edges with both hands in thedirection of the arrow.

Centre rear head restraint*

– The centre head restraint only has two posi-tions, in-use (head restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).

WARNING

● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position.

● Do not swap the centre rear head restraintwith either of the outer seat rear head re-straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment ofthe head restraints ››› page 128.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpairedto the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal mustbe pressed down thoroughly in order to stopthe vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING

● If the pedals are obstructed, an accidentmay occur. Risk of serious injuries.

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-erings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.

● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal area andimpair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-den driving or braking manoeuvre, you willnot be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-celerator pedal. Risk of accident!

60

Seat belts

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores ofseat belts

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for four seats. Two front seats and tworear seats.

WARNING

● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.

● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his orher seat. Children must be protected with anappropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt lamp*

The control lamp illuminates to remind thedriver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

– Fasten your seat belt securely.

– Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.

– Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight.

The control lamp on the instrument panellights up 1) if the driver or passenger1) hasnot fastened their belt when the ignition isswitched on.

If, when starting to drive, speed surpasses25 km/h (15 mph) approx. and no seat beltsare worn or they are unfastened during thedrive, a warning sound will be heard for a fewseconds. The warning light will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-nition switched on.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 75 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability of thebelts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury. »

1) Depending on the model version61

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just driv-ing around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injuryand improving the chances of survival wheninvolved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

Safety instructions on using seatbelts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.

● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-cupants must also wear the seat belts at alltimes, otherwise they run the risk of being in-jured.

● The seat belt cannot offer its full protectionif the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Never allow two passengers (even children)to share the same seat belt.

● Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of your seat as long as the vehicle is inmotion.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

● The seat belt must never be twisted while itis being worn.

● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)because this can cause injuries.

● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged orjammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.

● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoatover a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacityto protect.

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not beblocked with paper or other objects, as thiscan prevent the latch plate from engaging se-curely.

● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings orsimilar items to alter the position of the beltwebbing.

● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to theconnections, belt retractors or parts of thebuckle could cause severe injuries in theevent of an accident. Therefore, you mustcheck the condition of all seat belts at regularintervals.

● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-dent and stretched must be replaced by aspecialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-essary even if there is no apparent damage.The belt anchorage should also be checked.

● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.

● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise theretractors may not work properly››› page 198.

62

Seat belts

Physical principles of a frontal colli-sion

Fig. 76 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently

Fig. 77 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting thedriver wearing a seat belt

It is easy to explain how the laws of physicswork in the case of a head-on collision: whena vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

called “kinetic energy” is created both in thepassengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and the weight ofthe vehicle and its passengers. The higherthe speed and the greater the weight, themore energy there is to be “absorbed” in anaccident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-netic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-ple are not restrained by seat belts, in theevent of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbedsolely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengersare thrown forward and will make violent con-tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,windscreen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 76.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 77.

63

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

How to properly adjust yourseatbelt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 78 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

Fig. 79 Placing the seat belt in the shoulderand pelvis area for pregnant women.

Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ifthe seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latchplate and pull it slowly across your chest andlap.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click››› Fig. 78 A.

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automat-ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-dom of movement is permitted when theshoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-

ing sudden braking, during travel in steepareas or bends and during acceleration, theautomatic retractor on the shoulder belt islocked.

The automatic belt retractors on the frontseats are fitted with seat belt tensioners››› page 65.

Seat belt release

● Press the red button on the belt buckle››› Fig. 78 B. The latch plate is released andsprings out ››› .

● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat belts

Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-ly when they are properly positioned.

The following features are available to adjustthe seat belt in the shoulder region:

● belt height adjustment for the front seats.

● front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

● The seat belts offer best protection onlywhen the backrests are in an upright positionand the seat belts have been fastened prop-erly.

● Never put the latch plate in the buckle ofanother seat. If you do this, the seat belt will

64

Seat belts

not protect you properly and the risk of injuryis increased.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. If you do, you increase therisk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-vere injuries in the event of an accident.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fitcomfortably on the torso

● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach. Theseat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably onthe pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary totake up any slack.

● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis, never across the stomach, and alwayslie flat so that no pressure is exerted on theabdomen ››› Fig. 79.

● Always engage the retractor lock when youare securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1››› page 72.

● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 62.

Belt height adjustment

Fig. 80 Location of the belt height adjuster.

The seat belt adjuster for the front seats canbe used to adjust the proper belt position atthe shoulder.

– Press the upper part of the shoulder beltguide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 80.

– Move the shoulder belt guide up or downuntil you have adjusted the seat belt››› page 64.

– After adjusting, pull the shoulder beltsharply to check that the catch on theshoulder belt guide is engaged securely.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works


The seat belts for the occupants in the frontseats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli-sions and only if the seat belt is worn. Thisretracts and tightens the seat belts, reducingthe forward motion of the occupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered inthe event of minor collisions, if the vehicleoverturns, or in accidents where no majorforces act on the vehicle.

Note

● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and it isnot an indication of fire in the vehicle.

● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or components ofthe system are scrapped. Specialised work-shops are familiar with these regulations,which are also available to you.

65

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Service and disposal of belt tension-ers

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequence maybe that, in the event of an accident, the belttensioners function incorrectly or may notfunction at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known tothe specialised workshops, must be ob-served.

WARNING

● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners mayfail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-cumstances.

● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts.

● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-matic retractor cannot be repaired.

● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other repair

work, must be performed by a specialisedworkshop only.

● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must be changedif they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seatbelt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only work ef-fectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 61, The whys and where-fores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deploying

66

Airbag system

airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-pant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors that will triggeran airbag are: the type of accident, the angleof collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-to account that the visible damage in a vehi-cle involved in an accident, no matter howserious, is not a determining factor for theairbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-ing an incorrect sitting position can lead tocritical or fatal injuries.

● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustain criti-cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.Children up to 12 years old should always

travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-dren in the vehicle if they are not restrainedor the restraint system is not appropriate fortheir age, size or weight.

● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if youlean forward or to the side while travelling orassume an incorrect sitting position, there isa substantially increased risk of injury. Thisincreased risk of injury will be further in-creased if you are struck by an inflating air-bag.

● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflatingairbag, always wear the seat belt properly››› page 61.

● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

The airbag system mainly comprises (as pervehicle equipment):

● an electronic control and monitoring sys-tem (control unit)

● frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

● side airbags,

● curtain airbags,

● a control lamp on the dash panel››› page 68.

● key-operated switch for front passenger air-bag,

● a control lamp for disabling/enabling thefront passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 68,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

● the ignition is switched off

● there is a minor frontal collision

● there is a minor side collision

● there is a rear-end collision

● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

● The seat belts and airbags can only providemaximum protection if the occupants areseated correctly ››› page 56, Correct positionfor passengers.

● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise, during a »

67

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

frontal collision the system might not triggercorrectly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-tion of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions

● Driver airbag.

● Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions

● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);

● the hazard warning lights switch on;

● all doors are unlocked;

● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag and seat belt tensioner controllamp

The control lamp monitors all airbags andseat belt tensioners in the vehicle, includingcontrol units and wiring connections.

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner sys-tem

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systemsoperation is constantly monitored electroni-cally. Each time the ignition is switched on,the control lamp illuminates for severalseconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrumentpanel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER.

The system must be checked when the con-trol lamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warninglamp stays on continuously. In addition, de-pending on the malfunction, a fault messageappears on the instrument panel display forapproximately 10 seconds and a short audi-ble warning is given. In this event, you

68

Airbag system

should have a specialised workshop checkthe system immediately.

The airbag system availability is controlledelectronically, regardless of whether an air-bag is disabled.

If the front airbag, side airbag, head protec-tion airbag or the belt tensioner are disabledusing the diagnostics system:● After switching on the ignition, the warn-ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds andflashes for another 12 seconds.

The informative display indicates:

Airbag/belt tensioner disabled!If the front passenger airbag has been disa-bled with the airbag switch located in thestorage compartment side:● When the ignition is turned on, the warning lamp illuminates for about 4 sec-onds.

● The airbag is disabled, signalled with thewarning lamp which lights up with theword placed in the cen-tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 81››› page 71.

WARNING

● If there is a malfunction, the airbag andbelt tensioner system cannot properly per-form its protective function.

● If a malfunction occurs, have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,the airbag system and belt tensioners maynot be triggered, or may not be triggered cor-rectly.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags


WARNING

● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.

● The airbags provide protection for just oneaccident; replace them once they have de-ployed.

● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside part atthe 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Neverhold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock po-

sition, or in any other manner (e.g. in the cen-tre of the steering wheel). In such cases, ifthe airbag is triggered, you may sustain inju-ries to the arms, hands and head.

Side airbags*


WARNING

● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly while thevehicle is in motion, you are at a greater riskof injury if the side airbag system is triggeredin an accident.

● In order for the side airbags to provide theirmaximum protection, the prescribed sittingposition must always be maintained withseat belts fastened while travelling.

● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploymentspace between them and the airbags, or al-low children or other passengers to travel inthis position. It is also important not to at-tach any accessories (such as cup holders) tothe doors. This would impair the protectionoffered by the side airbags.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. »

69

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrestbolster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.

● Under no circumstances should protectivecovers be fitted over seats with side airbagsunless the covers have been approved for usein your vehicle. Because the airbag deploysfrom the side of the backrest, the use of con-ventional seat covers would obstruct the sideairbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-tiveness.

● Any damage to the original seat upholsteryor around the seams of the side airbag unitsmust be repaired immediately by a special-ised workshop.


● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag compo-nents for other repairs (such as removal ofthe front seat) should only be performed by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise, faults mayoccur during the airbag system operation.


● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior of thefront doors. To ensure the correct operation ofthe side and curtain (head) airbags neitherthe doors nor the door panels should bemodified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

system may not work correctly. All work car-ried out on the front door must be done in aspecialised workshop.

● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctly meas-ure the pressure increase on the interior ofthe doors, due to air escaping through theareas with holes or openings in the door pan-el.

● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panelshave been removed.

● Never drive if the interior door panels havebeen removed or if the panels have not beencorrectly fitted.

● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakersin the door panels have been removed, un-less the holes left by the loudspeakers havebeen closed properly.

● Always check that the openings are closedor covered if loudspeakers or other equip-ment are fitted inside the door panels.

● Any work carried out to the doors should bemade in an authorised specialised workshop.

Curtain airbags*


WARNING

● In order for the head-protection airbags toprovide their maximum protection, the pre-

scribed sitting position must always be main-tained with seat belts fastened while travel-ling.

● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag mustbe disabled in those vehicles fitted with ascreen dividing the interior of the vehicle.See your technical service to make this ad-justment.

● There must be no other persons, animals orobjects between the occupants of the rearseats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protec-tion airbag can deploy without restriction andprovide the greatest possible protection.Therefore, sun blinds which have not beenexpressly approved for use in your vehiclemay not be attached to the side windows

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-ers.


● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of the air-bag components for other repairs (such as re-moval of the roof lining) should only be per-formed by a specialised workshop. Other-wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-tem operation.


70

Airbag system

● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior of thefront doors. To ensure the correct operation ofthe side and curtain airbags neither thedoors nor the door panels should be modifiedin any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If thefront door is damaged, the airbag systemmay not work correctly. All work carried outon the front door must be done in a special-ised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Deactivation of the front airbag

The disabling of airbags is only carried out incertain cases, i.e. if:

● a child seat is required in the front passen-ger seat with the child facing in the oppositedirection to the direction of travel (in somecountries, due to divergent legal require-ments, facing in the direction of travel)››› page 74;

● despite the driver's seat being in the cor-rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cmcannot be maintained between the centre ofthe steering wheel and the driver's torso,

● installation of special devices is required inthe steering wheel area due to a physical dis-ability,

● if you have special seats installed (e.g. anorthopaedic seat without side airbags).

The front passenger front airbag can be disa-bled using the switch ››› page 71.

We recommend that you contact an author-ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-bags.

Airbag system control

The airbag system availability is controlledelectronically, regardless of whether an air-bag is disabled.

If an airbag was disabled using a diagnosticssystem:● the airbag system warning lamp illumi-nates after switching on the ignition forabout 4 seconds, and then flashes for about12 seconds.

If the airbag has been disabled with the air-bag switch on the side of the dash panel:● the airbag control lamp will illuminatefor about 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,

● the airbag is disabled, signalled with thewarning lamp which lights up with theword placed in the cen-tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 81 3 .

Note

● Follow the current legislation in your coun-try regarding the disabling of airbags.

● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can findinformation on which vehicle airbags can bedisabled.

Front passenger front airbag switch

Fig. 81 Front passenger front airbagswitch/warning lamp for disabling the frontpassenger airbag. »

71

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety


The switch disables only the front passengerfront airbag.

Switching on the airbag

– Switch the ignition off.

– Open the passenger side storage compart-ment.

– Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 81. About 3/4 of the key should en-ter, as far as it will go.

– Then turn the key gently to the position.Do not force it if you feel resistance, andmake sure you have inserted the key fully.

– Close the passenger side storage compart-ment.

– Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp does not illuminate,with the words in thecentre of the dash panel.

Control lamp with the word (front passenger airbag disabled)

If the front passenger front airbag is disa-bled, after switching on the ignition, the con-trol lamp will illuminate for several seconds,then it will switch off for about 1 s and thenswitch on again.

If the control lamp is flashing, there is a faultin the disabling of the airbag system ››› .Please go immediately to an Official Service.

WARNING

● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.

● Always switch off the ignition before disa-bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to doso could result in a fault in the airbag disa-bling system.

● Never leave the key in the airbag disablingswitch as it could get damaged or enable ordisable the airbag during driving.

● If the (airbag disabled) control lampflashes, the front passenger front airbag willnot trigger in the event of an accident! Havethe system immediately checked by an Offi-cial Service.

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 63. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children mustalways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

72

Transporting children safely

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 73.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag


Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 66, Why is it so importantto wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?.

● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 69.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-

ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 71.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 72.

WARNING

● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.

● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and project itwith great force against the door, the roof orthe backrest.

● Never install a child seat facing backwardson the front passenger seat unless the frontpassenger front airbag has been disabled.Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-ses, to transport a child in the front passen-ger seat, the front passenger front airbagmust always be disabled ››› page 71. If thefront passenger seat has a height adjustmentoption, move it to the highest position.

● For those vehicles that do not include a keylock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-cle must be taken to a technical service.

● All vehicle occupants, especially children,must assume the proper sitting position andbe properly belted in while travelling.

● Never hold children or babies on your lap,this can result in potentially fatal injuries tothe child!

● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, or tostand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-juries to themselves and to the other vehicleoccupants.

● If children assume an improper sitting posi-tion when the vehicle is moving, they exposethemselves to greater risk of injury in theevent of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in anaccident. This is particularly important if thechild is travelling on the front passenger seatand the airbag system is triggered in an acci-dent; as this could cause serious injury oreven death.

● A suitable child seat can protect your child!

● Never leave a child alone in the child seator inside the vehicle because depending onthe season, very high temperatures may bereached inside a parked vehicle, which couldbe fatal.

● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas during a suddenbraking manoeuvre or in an accident.

● Only one child may occupy a child seat››› page 74, Child seats.

73

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Child seats

Safety instructions


WARNING

● When travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suitablefor age, weight and size.

● Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 73.

WARNING

● The retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.

● Never secure other child seats that do nothave the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, orretaining belts or objects to the fasteningrings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-ries to the child.

● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-curing rings.

Categorisation of child seats intogroups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-sion for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18months)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4years old)

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7years old)

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE R44 standard bear thetest mark on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find theright child seat for your model and age groupat SEAT dealers.

WARNING

Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 73.

74

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

First-aid kit and warning triangle*

Fig. 82 Location of the warning triangle.

The warning triangle, measuring max.436 x 45 x 32 mm, can be secured to the lin-ing on the rear of the luggage compartmentwith rubber straps ››› Fig. 82.

WARNING

The first-aid kit and fire extinguisher must beproperly secured so that they are not catapul-ted through the vehicle during driving andbraking manoeuvres or in the event of an ac-cident. Risk of injury.

Note

● Observe the expiry date of the contents ofthe first aid kit.

● We recommend you use the first-aid kit andthe warning triangle from the SEAT OriginalAccessories programme available in author-ised SEAT dealers.

Fire extinguisher*

Read the instructions given on the fire extin-guisher carefully.

The fire extinguisher must be checked once ayear by an authorised person (take the appli-cable legal regulations into account).

WARNING

The fire extinguisher must be properly se-cured so that it is not catapulted through thevehicle, causing injuries, during driving andbraking manoeuvres or in the event of an ac-cident.

Note

● The fire extinguisher must comply with lo-cal legal requirements.

● Observe the expiry date of the fire extin-guisher. The fire extinguisher may not workproperly if used after the expiry date.

Vehicle tool kit*

Read the additional information carefully››› page 46

WARNING

● The factory-supplied jack is only designedfor changing wheels on this model of vehicle.On no account attempt to use it for lightingheavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury!

● Make sure that the vehicle tools are storedproperly in the luggage compartment.

Note

● Make sure the box always remains strap-ped to the spare wheel with tape.

● The jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

Changing a wheel

Introduction


WARNING

● If you have a puncture in moving traffic,switch on the hazard warning lights andplace the warning triangle at the obligatory »

75

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

distance. Observe applicable local legal regu-lations. This is for your own safety and that ofother drivers.

● If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle asfar away as possible from moving traffic. Stopon flat, solid ground.

● If you have to change the tyre on a gradi-ent, block the wheel opposite the wheel be-ing changed by placing a stone or similar ob-ject under it to prevent the vehicle from roll-ing away unexpectedly.

● If the vehicle has been fitted with tyres oralloys that are different to those fitted inmanufacture, the instructions ››› page 217,New tyres or wheels must be followed.

● Always raise the vehicle with the doorsclosed.

● Never place parts of your body, e.g. armsand legs, underneath the vehicle when it issupported only by the jack.

● Secure the base of the jack with suitablesupports so that it cannot slip. The jack couldslide if the ground below it is soft and slip-pery and the vehicle could slip off it. There-fore, place the jack on a firm surface or use alarge, stable base. On a slippery surface, e.g.tile, use a non-slip base such as a rubbermat.

● Never start the engine when the vehicle isjacked. Risk of injury.

● The jack should only be used in the correctjacking points.

CAUTION

● The prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

● If the anti-theft wheel bolt is overly tight-ened, this could damage the bolt and theadapter.

Note

● The set of anti-theft wheel bolts or theadapter are available from authorised SEATdealers.

● Please observe the relevant local legal reg-ulations when changing the wheel.

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels, e.g. to fitlight alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres,it is important to use the correct wheel boltswith the right length and correctly shapedbolt heads. This is essential for a secure fit ofthe wheels and for proper operation of thebrake system.

Note

● Never grease or oil the wheel bolts!

● If the wheel bolt is very tight, it may bepossible to loosen it by pushing down theend of the box spanner carefully with your

foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip.

● If you notice that the wheel bolts are rustyand difficult to turn when changing a wheel,they must be replaced before having thetightening torque checked.

Tyre repairs

TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre MobilitySystem)*


The Tyre Mobility System is stored in a boxunder the carpet in the boot.

Using the Tyre Mobility System you can relia-bly seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,provided that cuts or punctures are no largerthan approx. 4 mm in diameter. Do not re-move the foreign bodies, e.g. bolts or nails,from the tyre!

The tyre must be repaired immediately.

The repair made using the Tyre Mobility Sys-tem under no circumstances replaces perma-nent tyre repair and should only be used todrive to the nearest official service.

76

Self-help

The Tyre Mobility System kit shall not beused:

● If the wheel rim has been damaged,

● when the outside temperature is below-20°C (-4°F),

● on slashes or punctures larger than 4 mm,

● if the sidewall of the wheel has been dam-aged,

● If you have been driving with very low tyrepressure or a completely flat tyre

● If the best-before date on the air can hasexpired

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre at theroadside. Please observe the following rulesto minimise the risk of injury:

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park it at a safe distance from surroundingtraffic to fill the tyre.

● Ensure the ground on which you park is flatand solid.

● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the work area.

● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.

● Use the tyre mobility system only if you arefamiliar with the necessary procedures. Oth-erwise, you should seek professional assis-tance.

● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-rary emergency use only until you can reachthe nearest specialised workshop.

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-bility set as soon as possible.

● The sealant is a health hazard and must becleaned immediately if it comes into contactwith the skin.

● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of thereach of small children.

● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it hasbeen approved for your vehicle.

● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-brake lever firmly and engage gear if using amanual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofvehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.

● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering.

● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.


Dispose of used or expired sealant observingany legal requirements.

Note

● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased atSEAT dealerships.

● Take into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-er.

Components of the tyre mobility set*

Fig. 83 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 83:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” »

1

2

77

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe compressor).

Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-sor may have a button).

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressorand the inflator tube may become hot.

● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube orhot air compressor on flammable material.

● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.

● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in a

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-heating! Before switching on the air compres-sor again, let it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 83 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealedsufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.

● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious injury.

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressureis 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

● Seek specialist assistance.

Towing the vehicle

Introduction


Vehicles with manual gearbox can be towedusing a towbar or towrope. They can also betowed with either the front or rear wheels lif-ted off the road.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox can be tow-ed using a towbar or towrope. They can alsobe towed with the front wheels lifted off theroad. If the vehicle is towed with the rearwheels lifted off the road the automatic gear-box will be damaged!

Maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (31mph).

78

Self-help

CAUTION

● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of enginedamage! In vehicles with a catalytic convert-er, fuel that has not been burned could reachthe catalytic converter and catch fire in it.This could damage and destroy the catalyticconverter. You may use the battery from an-other vehicle to help you start your engine››› page 52.

● If, due to a fault, there is no oil in the gear-box, the car may only be towed with the driv-en wheels lifted clear of the road and trans-ported on a special vehicle transporter ortrailer.

● If normal towing is not possible or if the ve-hicle is to be towed for further than 50 km,the vehicle must be transported on a specialvehicle transporter or trailer.

● The towrope should be slightly elastic toreduce the load on both vehicles during tow-ing. It is advisable to use a towrope made ofsynthetic fibre or similar material only.

● Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand always take care to avoid jerking the tow-rope. When towing on a loose surface there isalways a risk of overloading and damagingthe anchorage points.

● Attach the towrope or towbar only to thetowline anchorages or to the removable tow-ing bracket ››› page 184, or ››› page 79.

Note

● We recommend you use the towrope or tow-bar available in the SEAT Original Accessoriesprogramme from authorised SEAT dealers.

● Towing a vehicle requires a certain degreeof practical skill. Both drivers should be fa-miliar with the technique required for towing.Inexperienced drivers should not attempt totow away another vehicle or to have their ve-hicle towed.

● Note the legal regulations concerning tow-ing, particularly those regarding the signal-ling of the towed and towing vehicle.

● The towrope must not be twisted, as undercertain circumstances this could unscrew thefront towline anchorage.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 84 Front bumper: towline anchorage cov-er/fitting.

Fitting and detaching the cover

– Press on the left of the cover as indicatedby the arrow ››› Fig. 84 .

– Pull on the cover to remove it from the frontbumper.

– To refit the cover after unscrewing the tow-line anchorage, fit the cover and press »

79

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

down on its right-hand side. The covermust be securely engaged.

Fitting and detaching the towline anchorage

– Screw in the towline anchorage anti-clock-wise by hand as far as it will go ››› Fig. 84.

To tighten the towline anchorage, we recom-mend using the box spanner, the towing eyefrom another vehicle or a similar object thatcan be inserted through the anchorage.

– Unscrew the towline anchorage by turningit clockwise.

CAUTION

The towline anchorage must be screwed in asfar as it will go. Otherwise there is a risk ofthe screw connection shearing off duringtowing or tow-starting!

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

Due to the constant updating of vehicles,fuse assignments based on equipment andthe use of the same fuse for various electricalcomponents, it is not possible to provide anup-to-date summary of the fuse positions forthe electrical components at the time thismanual was printed. For detailed informationabout the fuse positions, please consult atechnical service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

Additional information and warnings:

● Working in the engine compartment››› page 202.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system cangive serious electrical shocks, causing burnsand even death!

● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-tion system.

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-age (same colour and markings) and size.

● Never repair a fuse.

● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, stapleor similar.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electricsystem, before replacing a fuse always turnoff the ignition, the lights and all electricalelements and remove the key from the igni-tion.

● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to another partof the electrical system.

80

Fuses and bulbs

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as they candamage the electrical system.

● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-ers and refit them correctly to avoid problemswith your vehicle.

Note

● One component may have more than onefuse.

● Several components may run on a singlefuse.

● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. These shouldonly be changed by a specialised workshop.

● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.

● Some of the equipment listed in the tablesbelow pertain only to certain versions of themodel or are optional extras.

● Please note that the above lists, while cor-rect at the time of printing, are subject tochange.

Fuses in the dash panel

Fig. 85 Diagram of the fuse box to theleft/right of the steering wheel


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Fuse placement

No. Consumer

1 Left light

2Central locking, windscreen wipers, with KeylessAccess

3 Ignition system relay

4 Right light

5 Electric windows - Driver

No. Consumer

6 Central control unit - Interior lights

7 Horn

8 Towing bracket - Left light

9

Controls on steering column (without Keyless Ac-cess only), engine control unit (without KeylessAccess only), automatic gearbox control unit(without Keyless Access only), automatic gear-box lever (without Keyless Access only), ESPcontrol unit (without Keyless Access only), trailerhook control unit (without Keyless Access only),electric power steering (without Keyless Accessonly)

10 Rear left window

11 Headlight washer unit

12 Radio and navigation display

13 Preparation as taxi

14

Control lever under steering wheel, light switch,traction locking with ignition key (automatictransmission), headlight flasher, SmartGate con-trol device, rain/light sensor, rear camera

15Air conditioning system control unit, automaticgearbox selector lever, diagnostics connection

16 Instrument panel

17 Alarm sensor, horn

22Windscreen washer system (without Keyless Ac-cess)

23 Heated front seats »81

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

No. Consumer

24Air conditioning fan, heating, control unit for airconditioning, heating

26 Front seat heating switch.

27 Rear window wiper

29 Airbag

30

Electric windows, reversing light switch, air con-ditioning control unit, Park Assist control unit,exterior mirror, power supply for middle buttonbar, power supply for the side button bar, interi-or mirror

31Fuel pump, radiator fan control unit, cruise con-trol, relay coil for the windscreen and rear win-dow washer system, switch for the lights

32Diagnostics socket, headlight range regulator,control lever under the steering wheel, ambientlighting regulator

33 Ignition relay coil, clutch pedal switch

34 Heatable washer jets of windscreen washer

36 USB charging socket

37 Radar

39 Additional electric heating

41 Rear window heater

42 Electric windows - passenger

43 Towing bracket - Connector contact

No. Consumer

4412 V connection in the interior, 12 V connectionin the boot

45 Rear right window

46Windshield and front window washing system,control lever under the steering wheel

47 Towing bracket - Connector contact

48 Towing bracket - Right hand light

49 Fuel pump control unit

50 Radio

51 Heat for exterior mirrors

52 Keyless Access

53 Steering lock (Keyless Access)

54 ABS/ESC control unit

56 Diagnosis

59 Full LED

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 86 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover - 1st variant

82

Fuses and bulbs

Fig. 87 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover - 2nd variant


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Opening the fuse box

● Open the bonnet ››› page 202.

● Press lid locking clip upwards in the direc-tion of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 86 o ››› Fig. 87.

● Open the cover in the direction indicatedby the arrow 2 .

● Remove the plastic clip from the lid of thefuse box.

● Replace the appropriate fuse.

● Place the plastic clip back in its original po-sition.

● Place the lid on the fuse box and press un-til you hear it click into place.

Fuse placement

No. Consumer

1 Radiator fan

2 Control unit for the glow system


4 Additional electric heat - Circuit 2

5 Additional electric heat - Circuit 3

6 Automatic gearbox

7 Engine control unit

8 Front windscreen wipers

9 Central control unit, battery data module


12 Engine components

13 Brake pedal switch

No. Consumer

14Engine components, fuel coil relay, radiator fan,coolant pump


16 Starter motor


18Engine components, additional electric heat re-lay coils

19 Lambda probe

20Control devices for the glow system, heating ofthe sump fan

Changing bulbs

Introduction


Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen main headlights (double head-light).

● Full-LED main headlights*.

● Rear bulb light.

● LED rear light*. »83

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dippedbeam and route light) with light emitting di-odes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Double headlight bulb change

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill. If in doubt, we recommend youhave defective bulbs changed by a special-ised service or, in case of an emergency,seek professional assistance.

● Switch off the ignition and all of the lightsbefore changing a bulb.

● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb withyour bare hands. The fingerprints left on theglass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life andcausing condensation on the reflector sur-face, thus reducing effectiveness.

● A bulb must only be replaced by one of thesame type. The type is indicated on the bulb,either on the glass part or on the base.

● There is a storage area for the bulb box inthe spare wheel well or below the carpet inthe luggage compartment.

WARNING

● Take particular care when working on com-ponents in the engine compartment if the en-gine is warm. Risk of burns.

● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.

● When changing bulbs, please take care notto injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-light housing.

CAUTION

● Remove the ignition key before working onthe electric system. Otherwise, a short circuitcould occur.

● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.


Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note

● Depending on weather conditions (cold orwet), the front lights, the fog lights, the rearlights and the turn signals may be temporari-ly misted. This has no influence on the usefullife of the lighting system. By switching onthe lights, the area through which the beamof light is projected will quickly be demisted.However, the edges may continue to be mis-ted.

● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.

● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.

● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb withyour bare hands, use a cloth or paper towelinstead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left onthe glass will vaporise as a result of the heatgenerated by the bulb, they will be depositedon the reflector and damage its surface.

Double headlight bulbs

Fig. 88 Main headlight bulbs.

Installation position of double headlightbulbs

Side lights

Main beam headlights

A

B

84

Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam headlights

Turn signal lights

Daylight

Changing side light bulbs

Fig. 89 Changing side light bulbs.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Remove the protective cover ››› Fig. 89.

– Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 89 1 bypulling it outwards.

– Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fitthe new one.

– Installation involves all of the above stepsin reverse sequence.

– Fit the protective cover. Make sure that thecover fits correctly on the housing duringoperation.

– Check whether the new bulb is working.

C

D

E

Changing main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 90 Changing main beam headlightbulbs.


– Remove the protective cover.

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 90 1 by pullingoutward.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat it fits correctly into the recess on thereflector.




Changing dipped beam light bulbs

Fig. 91 Changing dipped beam headlightbulbs: wheel housing.

Fig. 92 Changing dipped beam headlightbulbs.

– Turn the wheel for access to the wheelhousing cover and remove the cover››› Fig. 91.

– Remove the protective cover from the head-light ››› Fig. 92. »

85

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 92 1 by pullingoutward.

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 92 2

pressing clockwise and inwards.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat the lug on the base fits into the recesson the reflector.

– Fit the connector.


– Replace the wheel housing cover.


Changing turn signal bulbs

Fig. 93 Changing turn signal bulbs.


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 93 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anti-clockwise at thesame time.

– Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holderand turn clockwise as far as it will go.


Changing daytime driving light bulbs

Fig. 94 Changing daytime driving light bulbs.


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 94 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anti-clockwise at thesame time.

– Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holderand turn clockwise as far as it will go.


Changing the fog light bulbs

Front fog light bulb

Fig. 95 Front fog light.


86

Fuses and bulbs

– Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 95 1 from the foglight grille with a screwdriver.

– Subsequently, remove the clips located onthe edge of the grille with gentle leverage.

– Remove the bolts (3x) ››› Fig. 96 2 to re-move the fog light.

– Remove the metal clip situated on the up-per part of the fog light by pulling towardsthe exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 96 3 .

Removing the bulb holder


– Remove connector ››› Fig. 97 1 from thebulb.

– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 97 2 anti-clockwise and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it counter-clockwise atthe same time.


– Check that the bulb works properly.

Changing the rear lights (onthe side panel)

Removing the rear light1)

Fig. 98 Remove the rear light unit from sidepanel.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the luggage compartment to accessthe rainduct area.

– Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)from the vehicle tool kit and loosen (turn-ing anti-clockwise) and remove the two re-taining screws that secure the front of thelight ››› Fig. 98 1 , taking care not to losethem. »

1) In the case of LED rear lights of the side panel onlythe turn signal lamp can be changed. The illustra-tions in the manual correspond to the bulb versionand do not correspond exactly to the LED version.

87

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

– Pull the rear light unit backward (››› Fig. 982 ) to remove the light from its housing.


Fig. 99 Light connector at the rear of the rearlight unit.

Fig. 100 Retaining screws on reverse side ofrear light unit.

– Disconnect the light connector A

››› Fig. 99 by moving its side levers (arrows)and pulling the connector outwards.

– Place the light on a level, horizontal surfaceon top of a soft cloth so as not to scratchthe outer glass.

– Unscrew the four retaining screws from thebulb holder anti-clockwise using a screw-driver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehi-cle tool kit ››› Fig. 100. Take care not to losethe bulb holder retaining screws.

Changing bulbs

Fig. 101 Position of the bulbs in the bulbholder

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten-er. The table below gives an overview of thebulb positions.

– Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulbholder and turn it clockwise as far as it willgo.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints fromthe glass part of the bulb.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Replace the bulb holder.

– Screw in the bulb holder using the fourscrews, turning them clockwise.

Position of the bulbs

››› Fig. 101 Bulb function

A Turn signals: PY21W NA LL

B Side lights-brake lights: P21/5W

C Side lights: P21/5W

Note

Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, areplacement can be acquired from an OfficialService.

88

Fuses and bulbs

Fitting the rear light

Fig. 102 Fit the tail light unit.

Fig. 103 Fit the tail light unit.

– Make sure the connector is correctly inplace.

– Press the rear light unit backwards (drivingdirection) by fitting the fastenings into therubber mountings ››› Fig. 102 A .

– Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)from the vehicle tool kit and tighten (turn-ing clockwise ››› Fig. 103) the two retainingscrews that secure the front of the light.

Changing tail lights (on therear lid)

Removing the bulb holder1)

Fig. 104 Remove the cover from the boot lid.

Fig. 105 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.

You can access the bulb holder for the innertail lights through the inside of the rear lid.

– Check which of the bulbs is defective. »

1) For rear-lid LED rear lights, only the reverse andretro fog bulb can be replaced. The illustrations inthe manual correspond to the bulb version and donot correspond exactly to the LED version.

89

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

– Open the cover to access the lights, turningit by hand in the direction indicated by thearrows.

– Access the lights by disconnecting the con-nector 1 ››› Fig. 105 and unscrewingthe bulb holder ››› Fig. 105 . Take care notto lose the bulb holder retaining screw.

– Change the bulbs ››› page 90.

Changing bulbs

Fig. 106 Position of the bulbs in the bulbholder

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten-er. The table below gives an overview of thebulbs ››› table on page 90.

– Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulbholder and turn it clockwise as far as it willgo.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints fromthe glass part of the bulb.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Re-install the bulb holder ››› page 90.

– Screw in the bulb holder.

Position of the bulbs

››› Fig. 106 Bulb function

A Reversing lights: P21W

B Side lights: R5W LL

C Fog lights: P21W

Note

One of the two sides may not be fitted with afog light, depending on the country and typeof driving. In this case, the hole for the lightis covered.

Fitting the bulb-holder

– Position the bulb holder on the tail lightand align it so that it is securely seated.

– Screw in the bulb holder using the corre-sponding screw.

– Make sure the connector is correctly inplace.

– Close the inner trim cover.

Note

Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, areplacement can be acquired from an OfficialService.

90

Fuses and bulbs

Changing the bulb on the num-ber plate


Fig. 107 Removing number plate light

Fig. 108 Changing the bulb.

– Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb››› Fig. 107.

– Remove the bulb, moving it in the directionof the arrow and outwards ››› Fig. 108.


Note

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds than thatof the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to anauthorised workshop for replacement.

91

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Fig. 109 Interior.

92

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

General instrument panel

Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . 115

Control for adjusting electric exteri-or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Multifunction switch lever:

– Turn signals, headlights, parkinglights, headlight flasher . . . . . . . . 118

– Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Steering wheel:

– With horn

– With the driver front airbag . . . . . . 14

– With controls for audio, naviga-tion system and telephone . . . . . . 100

General instrument panel: instru-ments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . 93

Multifunction switch lever:

– Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 23

– Windscreen wipers and wind-screen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Depending on the equipment:

– Audio system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– Navigation system

Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . 121

Control lamp for front passengerairbag deactivated warning lamp . . 71

Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 71

Depending on the equipment,glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 131

– CD player* and/or SD card*››› Booklet Radio

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Fuse compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104


– Gear lever (manual gearbox) . . . . 156

– Selector lever (automatic gear-box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158


– Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

– Ashtray holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Depending on the equipment, con-trols for:

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

– Driver heated seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

– Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

– Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

– Front passenger heated seat . . . . 128


– Heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

– Air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . 145

– Climatronic controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Note

The location of the controls of right-handdrive cars differs slightly from the locationshown here ››› Fig. 109. However, the sym-bols correspond to the respective controls.

26

93

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Instruments and warning lamps

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 110 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 110:

Rev counter (with the engine running, inhundreds of revolutions per minute).

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed inany gear after running-in and with the en-gine hot. However, it is advisable tochange up a gear or move the selectorlever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler-

1

ator) before the needle reaches the redzone ››› .

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 205.

Displays on the screen.

Adjuster button and display››› page 97.

Speedometer.

2

3

4

5

Fuel gauge ››› page 98.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

6

94


CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in the redzone for a short period of time.

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not make theengine work hard.


Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-sumption and noise.

Rev counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 110 1 .

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicatesthe maximum engine speed which may beused briefly when the engine is warm and af-ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-ing this range, you should change to a highergear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or forautomatic gearboxes put the selector lever in“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped-al.

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the additionalinformation in ››› page 25.

CAUTION

Never allow the rev counter needle 1

››› Fig. 110 to go into the red zone on thescale for more than a very brief period, other-wise there is a risk of engine damage.


Changing up a gear early will help you to savefuel and minimise emissions and enginenoise.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 110 3 de-pending on the vehicle equipment:

● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open››› page 25.

● Information and warning texts.

● Mileage.

● Time.

● Navigation instructions.

● Outside temperature.

● Compass.

● Shift lever position ››› page 158.

● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)››› page 25.

● Multifunction display (MFD) and menuswith different setting options ››› page 23.

● Service interval display ››› page 30.

● Second speed display ››› page 26.

● Speed warning function ››› page 29.

● Start-Stop system status display››› page 181.

● Low consumption driving status (ECO)››› page 96

● Identifying letters on engine (MKB).

Distance travelled

The odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distancetravelled since the last odometer reset. Thelast digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 110 4 to re-set the trip recorder to 0.

● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3seconds and the previous value will be dis-played. »

95

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Time

● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 1104 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select

the hour or minute display.

● To continue setting the time, press the up-per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but-ton down to scroll through the numbersquickly.

● Press the button 4 again in order to finishsetting the time.

The time can also be set via the key andSetup function button in the Easy Connect

system ››› page 99.

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys-tem on, the cardinal point corresponding tothe direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-played on the instrument panel.

Selector lever position

The selected gear is displayed on the side ofthe selector lever and on the instrument pan-el display. In positions D and S, and with theTiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-played.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuelis displayed on the instrument panel whileyou are driving ››› page 25.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speedcan also be displayed in a different unit ofmeasurement (in miles or in km per hour).

This option cannot be deactivated in modelsdestined for countries in which the secondspeed must always be visible.

The second speed display can be adjusted inthe Easy Connect system via the key andthe Setup function button ››› page 99.

Speed warning

When the speed setting is exceeded, this willbe indicated on the instrument panel display.This is very useful, for example when usingwinter tyres that are not designed for drivingat the maximum speed of the vehicle››› page 29.

The speed warning settings can be adjustedin the Easy Connect system via the keyand the Setup function button ››› page 99.

Start-Stop operating display

Updated information relating to the status isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 181.

Low consumption driving status (ECO)*

Depending on the equipment, when driving,the “ECO” display appears on the instrument

panel when the vehicle is in low consump-tion status.

Identifying letters on engine (MKB)

Hold the button ››› Fig. 110 4 down for morethan 15 seconds to display the identifyingletters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To dothis, the ignition must be switched on andthe engine switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warningand control lamps on page 98.

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are abovefreezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.

● At outside temperatures above +4°C(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”is not visible, there may still be patches of iceon the road.

● Never rely on the outside temperature indi-cator!

Note

● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versions andinstructions on the display may vary. In thecase of displays without warning or informa-tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively bythe warning lamps.

96


● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can also be carried outin the Easy Connect system.

● When several warnings are active at thesame time, the symbols are shown succes-sively for a few seconds and will stay on untilthe fault is rectified.

Odometer

Fig. 111 Instrument panel: odometer and re-set button.

The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to changethe measurement units (kilometres“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.Please refer to the Easy Connect* InstructionsManual for more details.

Odometer/trip recorder

The odometer shows the total distance cov-ered by the vehicle.

The trip recorder shows the distance that hasbeen travelled since it was last reset. It isused to measure short trips. The last digit ofthe trip recorder indicates distances of 100metres or tenths of a mile.

The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 111.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument panel, theletters DEF will appear in the trip recorderdisplay. Have the fault repaired immediately,as far as is possible.

Engine coolant temperature display

For vehicles with no coolant temperaturegauge, a control lamp appears for highcoolant temperatures ››› page 208. Pleasenote ››› .

The coolant temperature gauge 2

››› Fig. 110 only works when the ignition isswitched on. In order to avoid engine dam-age, please read the following notes for thedifferent temperature ranges.

Engine cold

If only the diodes in the lower part of thescale light up, this indicates that the enginehas not yet reached operating temperature.Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration anddo not make the engine work hard.

Normal temperature

If in normal operations, the diodes light upuntil the central zone, it means that the en-gine has reached operating temperature. Athigh outside temperatures and when makingthe engine work hard, the diodes may contin-ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. Thisis no cause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up on the instrumentpanel digital display.

Heat range

When the diodes light up in the upper area ofthe display and the control lamp appears on the instrument panel display, the coolanttemperature is excessive ››› page 208.

CAUTION

● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-so depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 205 as a guide. »

97

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling effectof the coolant. At high outside temperaturesand high engine loads, there is a risk of theengine overheating.

● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-bution of the cooling air when the vehicle ismoving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-duce the cooling effect, which could causethe engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Fuel level gauge

Fig. 112 Fuel gauge.

The fuel gauge ››› Fig. 112 operates onlywhen the ignition is switched on.

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li-tres. When the needle reaches the fuel re-serve area there are only approximately 7 li-tres left in the tank. In the general instrument

panel a warning signal lights up and anaudible signal sounds.


Refuel! Fuel range…km...(miles)

CAUTION

Never completely empty the tank! An irregu-larity in the fuel supply system can cause ir-regularities when the engine is running. Un-burned fuel can reach the exhaust gas sys-tem, which can cause deterioration of the cat-alytic converter.

Note

● Some vehicles come fitted with the fuelgauge on the general instrument panel.

● The message on the display switches offonly after refuelling and carrying out a shortjourney.

Control lamps

Warning and control lamps


The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-tions. Some control and warning lamps comeon when the ignition is switched on, and

switch off when the engine starts running, orwhile driving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 94.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or maycause accidents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-sure that there are no highly flammable ma-terials under the vehicle that could come intocontact with the exhaust system (e.g. drygrass, fuel).

● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users. Ifnecessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-vise other drivers.

98

Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.

● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is ahazardous area and could cause severe inju-ries ››› page 202.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

Introduction to the EasyConnect system*

System settings (CAR)*

CAR menu (Setup)


To select the settings menus, press the EasyConnect button and the Setup functionbutton.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options in these me-nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronicsand equipment.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing those me-nus.

Function buttons in thevehicle settingsmenu

Page

ESC system ››› page 154

Tyres ››› page 219

Driver assistance ››› table on page 21

Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 167

Vehicle lights ››› table on page 21

Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 21

Opening and closing ››› table on page 21

Multifunction display ››› table on page 21

Date and time ››› table on page 21

Units ››› table on page 21

Service ››› page 30

Factory settings ››› table on page 21

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connectsystem while driving could distract you fromtraffic.

99

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Communications and multi-media

Steering wheel controls*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to controlthe audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract thedriver.

There are two versions of the multifunctionmodule:

● Audio system + telephone without voicecontrol version (MID): for controlling the au-dio functions available (radio, audio CD,MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth sys-tem from the steering wheel.

● Audio system + telephone with voice con-trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audiofunctions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth systemfrom the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.100

Communications and multimedia

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)

Fig. 113 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

ATurn: Turn volume up/down

Press: MuteTurn: Turn volume up/down




Press: Mute

BShort press: access to the tele-phone menu in the instrument

panela).

Short press: access to the tele-phone menu in the instrument

panela).


panela).

Short press: answer/hang upcalls, enable/open the tele-

phone menu.Hold down: reject an incomingcall/switch to private mode/re-

diala).


panela).

C Search for last stationShort press: switch to the previ-

ous songHold down: quick rewind

No function No function No function

D Search for the next stationShort press: switch to the next

songHold down: fast forward

No function No function No function

E , FChange menu on instrument

panela)Change menu on instrument




panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source »

101

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

HTurn: Next/previous presetb)

Press: Acts on the MFDTurn: Next/previous songb)

Press: Acts on the MFDTurn: No function

Press: Acts on the MFDTurn: Acts on the MFD

Press: Confirm

Turn: Changes menu or memoryon instrument panel

Press: Operates on instrumentpanel

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)

Fig. 114 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

ATurn: Turn volume up/down





Press: Mute

B

Short press: access to the tele-phone menu on the dash pan-

ela).Hold down: rediala)





Short press: answer/hang upcalls, enable/open the tele-

phone menu.Hold down: reject an incoming

call/switch to private/redialmode



102

Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

C Search for last stationShort press: switch to the previ-

ous songHold down: quick rewind

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex-cept AUX )

D Search for the next stationShort press: switch to the next

songHold down: fast forward

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex-cept AUX )

E , FChange menu on instrument

panelChange menu on instrument




panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

H

Turn: Next/previous presetc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Next/previous songc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the dash panelmenu depending on where it is

locatedPress: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option



menu option



menu option

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

103

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 115 USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connec-tion.

The USB/AUX-IN input is located above thestorage compartment in the front centre con-sole ››› Fig. 115.

The operating description is located in the re-spective Instruction Manuals of the audiosystem or the navigation system.

Opening and closing

Remote control

General notes


The remote control key can● Lock and unlock the vehicle

● Unlock or open the rear lid

The remote control transmitter and the bat-teries are integrated in the key. The receiveris inside the vehicle. The remote control keyhas a maximum range of 30 metres. Therange is reduced as the batteries start to losepower.

The key includes a foldaway part that can beused to manually lock or unlock the vehicleand to start the engine.

If a lost key is replaced or the receiver is re-paired or changed, the remote control keymust be adapted by an authorised SEAT deal-er. Only then can the remote control key beused again.

Note

● The remote control is automatically deacti-vated when the ignition is switched on.

● The remote control function may be tempo-rarily limited by interference from othertransmitters near the vehicle that operate onthe same frequency (e.g. mobile phone, tele-vision transmitter).

● If the central locking system or the anti-theft alarm only responds to the remote con-trol at a distance of less than 3 metres, thenthe battery must be replaced ››› page 106.

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-not be locked using the remote control.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

Fig. 116 Remote control key

Unlocking the vehicle

– Press button 1 .

Locking the vehicle


104

Opening and closing

Deactivating the Safe lock

– Press button 2 twice in 2 seconds. Furtherinformation ››› page 107.

Unlocking the rear lid

– Press button 3 . Further information››› page 114.

Unfolding the key shaft


Folding the key shaft

– Press button 4 and fold the key shaft backto its original position.

The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked. If the vehicle is unlockedusing button 1 and none of the doors or therear lid is opened in the following 30 sec-onds, the vehicle will automatically relockand the Safe lock or the anti-theft alarm willbe activated. This function prevents the vehi-cle from being unlocked by mistake.

Locking indication

The turn signals will flash if the vehicle hasbeen correctly locked.

Should any of the doors or the rear lid remainopen when the vehicle is locked, the turn sig-nals will only flash when they are closed.

WARNING

Do not leave people or animals in vehicleslocked from outside with the Safe lock activa-ted: the doors and windows cannot then beopened from the inside. Doors locked in thismanner could delay assistance in an emer-gency. Risk of death!

Note

● Only use the remote control when thedoors and the rear lid are locked and the ve-hicle is within sight.

● Do not press the lock button on the re-mote control before inserting the key in theignition, otherwise the vehicle could belocked by mistake. Should this occur, pressthe unlock button on the remote control.

Remote control synchronisation

f the vehicle cannot be locked or unlockedusing the remote control, the key code maynot match that of the control unit. This canoccur when the remote control buttons arefrequently pressed outside the range of thesystem or if the remote control battery hasbeen replaced.

In this case, it must be synchronised as fol-lows:● Press any key on the remote control key.

● Open the door using the key within thenext minute.

Keys

General notes

Fig. 117 Key with remote control/Key withoutremote control.

Two keys are always supplied with the vehi-cle. Depending on the model version, yourcar may include keys without remote control››› Fig. 117 or with remote control››› Fig. 117 . »

105

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Never leave the key inside whenever youleave the vehicle - even if only for a moment.This is particularly important if children areto remain in the vehicle. Children might startthe engine or some other electrical compo-nent, e.g. electric windows. Risk of injury!

● Wait until the vehicle has completely stop-ped before taking the key out of the ignition.Otherwise the steering wheel may lock sud-denly. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

● Each key contains electronic componentsand must, therefore, be protected from damp-ness and strong vibrations.

● Keep the grooves in the key shaft clean.Any dirt (fibre from clothing, dust, etc.) has anegative impact on locks, ignition, etc.

Note

Should a key be lost, request a duplicate keyfrom an Authorised SEAT dealer.

Replacing the battery in the remotecontrol key

Fig. 118 Vehicle key: opening the batterycompartment

Fig. 119 Vehicle key: removing the battery

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

● Unfold the vehicle key shaft.

● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 118 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .

● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 119.

● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 119, pressing in the oppo-site direction to that shown by the arrow››› .

● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 118, pressingit onto the vehicle key casing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION

● If the battery is not changed correctly, thevehicle key may be damaged.

● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.

● When fitting the battery, check that the po-larity is correct.


Please dispose of your used batteries correct-ly and with respect for the environment.

106

Opening and closing

Note

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the vehi-cle with the remote control key once the bat-tery has been replaced, it will need to be re-synchronised ››› page 105.

Central locking system

General notes

All of the doors, the boot lid and the fuel capflap will1) unlock at the same time when thecentral locking system is used.

Warning lamp on the driver door

Once the doors are locked, the warning lampwill flash quickly for 2 seconds and then at aslower rate.

If the vehicle is locked with Safe lock engag-ed ››› page 108, the warning lamp on thedriver door will flash quickly for 2 secondsbefore switching off for 30 seconds and thenflashing at a slower rate.

If the warning lamp flashes quickly for 2 sec-onds and then remains switched on beforeflashing at a slower rate after 30 seconds,there is a fault in the interior monitor and

tow-away protection system ››› page 113. Goto a technical service.

Individualised settings

Unlocking single doors

This optional function unlocks the driver dooronly. The other doors remain locked and areonly unlocked when the next command is giv-en (unlock).

Automatic unlock and lock

The doors and the rear lid are locked auto-matically when the vehicle reaches a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The doors unlock automatically when the keyis removed from the ignition. Additionally,the driver or front passenger can unlock thedoors by pressing the ››› page 109 centrallock button or by pulling the front door han-dle.

WARNING

Locking the doors prevents intruders fromgetting into the car, e.g. while waiting at in-tersections. However, it can also delay assis-tance in the event of an accident. Risk ofdeath!

Note

● Activation of the single door setting can berequested at your SEAT dealer.

● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags deploy, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked for easier access and assistance.

● If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, only the driver door can belocked or unlocked using the key››› page 108. All other doors and the boothatch can be operated manually.

– Manual release ››› page 10.

– Manual release of the rear lid››› page 10.

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.107

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Unlocking with key

Fig. 120 Key positions during vehicle lockingand unlocking.

– Turn the key in the driver door in the for-ward driving direction to its unlock positionA ››› Fig. 120.

– Pull the handle and open the door.

● All doors (driver door only on vehicles withanti-theft alarm) are unlocked.

● The rear lid is unlocked.

● The fuel tank flap is unlocked1).

● The courtesy lights switch on.

● The Safe lock is deactivated.

● The driver door warning lamp stops flash-ing (on vehicles not equipped with an anti-theft system) ››› page 112.

Note

If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theftalarm system, you have 15 seconds from thetime the door is opened to insert the key inthe ignition and start the vehicle. If, duringthese 15 seconds, the vehicle is not started,the alarm is triggered.

Lock with key

– Turn the key in the driver door lock cylinderin the reverse direction to its lock positionB ››› Fig. 120.

● The doors, the boot lid and the fuel tankflap1) will be locked.

● The courtesy lights switch off.

● The Safe lock is immediately activated.

● Warning lamp on the driver door starts toflash.

Note

The vehicle doors cannot be locked if thedriver door is open.

Safe Lock

The central locking system is equipped with aSafe lock. If the vehicle is closed from out-side, the door locks will automatically lock.The warning lamp on the driver door willflash quickly for about 2 seconds and then ata slower rate. It is not possible to open any ofthe doors from the inside or outside usingthe handle. This limits the possibility of in-truders getting into the vehicle.

The Safe lock can be deactivated by pressingthe lock button twice in less than 2 seconds.

If Safe lock is out of service, the control lampon the driver door will flash quickly for about2 seconds before switching off for 30 sec-onds and then flashing at a slower rate.

The Safe lock is re-activated on unlockingand locking the vehicle again.

If the vehicle is locked and the Safe lock isdeactivated, the vehicle can be opened frominside by pulling on the door handle.

WARNING

Do not leave people or animals in locked ve-hicles with Safe lock activated: the doors andwindows cannot then be opened from the in-side. Doors locked in this manner could delayassistance in an emergency. Risk of death!


Opening and closing

Note

● The anti-theft alarm switches on automati-cally when the vehicle is locked, even if theSafe lock is deactivated. The Vehicle interiormonitoring, however, is not activated.

● Given that the Safe function will be activa-ted on locking the vehicle, CHECK DEADLOCKwill be shown on the general instrument pan-el display. On vehicles equipped with an in-formative display, Caution SAFE! On-board documentation!

Central locking button

Fig. 121 Central lock button.

If the vehicle has not been locked from out-side, it is possible to lock and unlock thedoors from inside by pressing the ››› Fig. 121button, even without the key in the ignition.

Locking of all doors, the boot lid and the fueltank flap1)

– Press the button ››› Fig. 121. The warninglamp on the button will light up.

Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and thefuel tank cap1)

– Press the button ››› Fig. 121. The warninglamp on the button will switch off.

If the vehicle has been locked using the cen-tral lock button.● The rear boot lid cannot be unlocked fromthe outside (security measure, e.g. whenstopped at an intersection).

● The doors can be unlocked individually bypulling the handle.

● The vehicle doors cannot be locked if anyof the doors are open.

● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags activate, doors locked from the insidewill be automatically unlocked for easier ac-cess and assistance.

WARNING

The central locking system remains operativewhen the ignition is switched off. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, as doorslocked from the inside delay assistance in anemergency. Risk of sustaining fatal injuries!

Note

The handles and the central lock buttons willnot work if the Safe lock ››› page 108 is acti-vated.


Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Unlocking and locking the vehiclewith Keyless Access

Fig. 122 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: in the proximity of the car.

Fig. 123 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: sensor surface A for unlocking in-side the door handle and sensor surface B

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. For this, only a

valid vehicle key is required to be in an areanear ››› Fig. 122 the vehicle and one of thesensor surfaces to be touched on the doorhandles ››› Fig. 123.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of thecar ››› Fig. 122, the Keyless Access lock andignition system gives the key entry as soonas one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles is touched or the push button on theboot hatch is operated. The following fea-tures are then available without having touse the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle withthe handles on the four doors or the buttonlocated on the boot hatch.

● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. Forthis to occur, there has to be a valid key in-side the vehicle and the ››› page 151.

● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle withone of the four door handle.

The central locking and locking systems oper-ate in the same way as a normal locking andunlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; lockingby a single flash.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry)

● Grip the door handle. In doing this, thesensor surface ››› Fig. 123 A (arrow) istouched on the handle and the vehicle un-locks.

● Open the door.

On vehicles without a "safe" system: closingand locking the doors (Keyless-Exit)

● Switch the ignition off.

● Close the driver's door.

● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow)on the door handle. The door being operatedmust be closed.

On vehicles with a "safe" security system:locking and unlocking doors (Keyless-Exit)

● Switch the ignition off.

● Close the driver's door.

● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow)on the door handle. The vehicle locks withthe "safe" security system ››› page 108. Thedoor being operated must be closed.

● Touch the sensor surface B twice (arrow)on the door handle to lock the vehicle with-out the "safe" security system ››› page 108.

110

Opening and closing

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto-matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 122there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.

Open or close the hatch normally››› page 113.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically.In the following instances, the rear lid doesnot lock automatically after closing:

● If the entire vehicle is unlocked.

● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. Allvehicle indicator lights flash four times. Thevehicle will lock again after a few seconds ifno door or boot hatch are opened.

Locking the vehicle with a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a secondvehicle key, the key inside the vehicle isblocked for engine ignition ››› page 149. Inorder to enable engine ignition, the button on the key inside the vehicle needs to bepressed ››› page 104.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensor onthe passenger door is automatically disa-bled.

If the exterior sensor on the door handle isoften activated unusually with the vehicle

locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rub-bing against it), all proximity sensors are dis-abled for a time. If this only happens with theexterior sensor on the driver's door, only thissensor is disabled.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.

● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.

● OR: if the boot is opened.

Convenience functions

To close all electric windows, the sun roofand electric tilting panoramic roof with theconvenience feature, keep your finger for afew seconds on the lock sensor surface››› Fig. 123 B located on the exterior part ofthe driver or passenger door handle until thewindows and roof close.

Opening the doors by touching the sensorsurface on the handle takes place in accord-ance with the settings activated on the menuConfiguration - Convenience.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehicle keyin the nearby area. If at least one of the win-dows is open and the sensor surface B onone of the handle permanently activates, all

windows will close. If the water jet or steamis briefly moved away from the sensor sur-face A on one of the handles and then poin-ted at it again, all the windows will probablyopen ››› page 111, Convenience functions.

Note

● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-ly out of charge, it is likely that the vehiclewill not be able to be lock or unlocked withthe Keyless Access system. The vehicle canbe unlocked or locked manually››› page 9.

● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle orthe system fails to detect one, a warning willdisplay on the dash panel screen. This couldhappen if any other radio frequency signal in-terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-bile device accessory) or if the key is coveredby another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-er of salt, how the sensors on the door han-dles operate may be affected. If this is thecase, wash the vehicle ››› page 193.

● If the vehicle is equipped with an automaticgearbox, it may only be locked in the gearstick is in position P.

111

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Child-proof locking

Fig. 124 Activating the childproof lock.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. Doorscan only be opened from the outside.

The childproof lock is activated and deactiva-ted using the ignition key.

Activating the childproof lock

– Turn the slot in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 124 (in the other direction on theright-hand door).

Deactivating the childproof lock

– Turn the slot in the opposite direction ofthe arrow (in the other direction on theright-hand door).

Anti-theft alarm system*

General notes

The anti-theft alarm system increases vehicleprotection from intruders. The system will ini-tiate acoustic and optical warning signalswhen your vehicle is tried to be forced.

Activating the alarm system

The anti-theft alarm switches on automatical-ly when the vehicle is locked using the re-mote control key or inserting the key in thedriver door. The alarm is activated around 30seconds after the vehicle is locked.

Deactivating the alarm system

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivatedwhen the remote control unlock button ispressed. If the vehicle is not opened within30 seconds after emitting the radio frequen-cy signal, the system will be reactivated.

If the vehicle is unlocked using by insertingthe key in the driver door, the ignition mustbe switched on within 15 seconds. This deac-tivates the alarm system. If, during these 15seconds, the vehicle is not started, the alarmis triggered.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The following areas of the vehicle are moni-tored:

● Bonnet

● Rear lid

● Doors

● Ignition

● Tilt angle ››› page 113, Vehicle interiormonitoring and anti-tow system

● The interior ››› page 113, Vehicle interiormonitoring and anti-tow system

● Drop in voltage in the car systems

● The factory-fitted towing bracket

The alarm is triggered immediately if one ofthe battery cables is disconnected while thealarm system is active.

How to turn OFF the alarm

To deactivate the alarm, press the unlock but-ton on the remote control key or switch onthe ignition.

Note

● The alarm horn power supply has a 5-yearuseful life. Contact an Official Service formore detailed information.

● To make sure that the anti-theft alarm isfully operative when leaving the vehicle,check that all the doors and windows areclosed.

112

Opening and closing

● Remote control and receiver unit codingmeans that the remote control cannot beused on other vehicles.

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system

Fig. 125 Button for vehicle interior monitor-ing and the tow-away protection system.

The Vehicle interior monitoring system is acti-vated if movements are detected in the interi-or of the vehicle.

Deactivating Vehicle interior monitoring andthe tow-away protection system


– Open the driver door.

– Press the ››› Fig. 125 button on the cen-tre column. The red backlit symbol onthe button turns orange.

– Lock the vehicle within the next 30 sec-onds.

The Vehicle interior monitoring system andthe tow-away protection system are reactiva-ted when the vehicle is unlocked again.

Note

● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe tow-away protection system must be de-activated if there is a danger of the alarm be-ing triggered due to movements by childrenor animals in the interior when being trans-ported (e.g. by boat or by train) or towed.

● The effectiveness of the Vehicle interiormonitoring system is reduced if the spectaclecase is left open. Always close the storagecompartment before locking the vehicle toensure that this monitoring system operatescorrectly.

Rear lid

Tailgate automatic lock

Where the vehicle has been locked by press-ing the button on the remote control withthe boot lid open, the boot lid will lock auto-matically when closed.

The automatic rear lid locking time extensionfunction can be activated. When this functionis activated and once the boot lid has been

unlocked by pressing the button on theremote control key 2 ››› page 104, the bootlid can be re-opened for a certain length oftime.

Where required, the automatic boot lid lock-ing time extension function can be activatedor deactivated at a SEAT Authorised Service,which will provide all of the necessary infor-mation.

Before the vehicle locks automatically, thereis a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.Therefore, we recommend you always lockthe vehicle by pressing the button on theremote control or by using the key without re-mote control ››› page 108

113

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Rear lid

Fig. 126 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

Fig. 127 Close-up of the inside trim of therear lid: hand grip


The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by using the handle onthe boot lid.

This system may or may not be operative, de-pending on the situation of the vehicle.

If the rear lid is locked then it cannot beopened, however if it is unlocked then theopening system is operative and the rear lidmay be opened.

To change the locking / unlocking status,press the button or the button 1

››› Fig. 116 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the boot lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given ifthe boot lid is opened while the vehicle ismoving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

WARNING

● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk ofaccident or injury.

● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it downwith your hand on the rear window. The glasscould smash. Risk of injury!

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-ing.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjectedto extremely high and low temperatures, de-pending on the time of year, thus causing se-rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatalconsequences. Close and lock both the rearlid and all the other doors when you are notusing the vehicle.

● Closing the rear lid without observing andensuring it is clear could cause serious injuryto you and to third parties. Make sure that noone is in the path of the rear lid.

● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into theinterior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

● If you only open the rear lid, do not leavethe key inside. The vehicle will not be openedif the key is left inside.

Note

● Once the rear lid is closed, its lock is en-gaged and the alarm system is activated. On-ly valid if the vehicle has been locked beforethe rear lid is closed.

● The release catch located at the top of theregistration plate recess is deactivated on ac-celerating or at speeds of over 5 km/h (3mph). The catch is reactivated when the vehi-cle comes to a standstill and a door isopened.

114

Opening and closing

Opening and closing of electricwindows

Operation of the electric windows

Fig. 128 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.


The electric window opening and closing sys-tem only works when the ignition is switchedon.

Opening

– Press gently on the respective button onthe door to open the window. The processwill stop when the button is released.

– The driver door window can also be auto-matically opened by pressing the button asfar as it will go (fully open). Press the but-ton again to immediately stop it.

Closing

– Press the respective button gently to closethe window. The process will stop when thebutton is released.

Safety button

Press the safety button 5 ››› Fig. 128 to de-activate the controls on the rear doors. Press-ing the safety button 5 again will reactivatethe controls on the rear doors.

If the rear door controls are deactivated, thewarning lamp on the safety button 5 willlight up.

WARNING

● When locking the vehicle from the outside,make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle,as the windows cannot be opened from theinside in an emergency.

● For safety reasons, use safety button 5

››› Fig. 128 that deactivates the windowswitches on the rear doors when children aretravelling in the rear seats.

CAUTION

● Keep the windows clean to ensure the sys-tem operates correctly.

● Defrost ››› page 196, Windows and mirrorsany frozen windows before use. Otherwiseyou run the risk of damaging the electric win-dow riser mechanism.

● Always make sure all of the windows areclosed on leaving the locked vehicle.

Note

● The vehicle heating and ventilation systemshould be used to ventilate the interior whiledriving. Leaving the windows open could al-low dust and other dirt to enter the vehicleand cause unpleasant noises at certainspeeds.

● Do not leave the side windows open at highspeeds, as this will overly increase fuel con-sumption.

Note

The electric window opening mechanism isequipped with a thermostat switch. This mayoverheat if the window is opened and closedrepeatedly. This causes the window to locktemporarily. Once the thermostat switch hascooled down, the window can be operatedonce again.

Roll-back function on the electric win-dows

The electric windows are equipped with aroll-back system that reduces risk of injurywhen closing windows. »

115

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

If an obstacle is present, the closing mecha-nism will stop and the window will roll back afew centimetres.

If an obstacle prevents closing for the next10 seconds, the closing mechanism will onceagain stop and the window will roll back an-other few centimetres.

If in the next 10 seconds you attempt to closethe window after it has rolled back the sec-ond time, only the closing mechanism will bestopped even if the obstacle is still present.The roll-back function is still connected.

The roll-back function will only be disconnec-ted if you once again attempt to close thewindow in the following 10 seconds. In thiscase, the window will close at full force.

If you wait for a further 10 seconds, the roll-back function will be once again connected.


Lights

Introduction


The location of the controls of right-handdrive cars differs slightly from the locationshown here ››› Fig. 129 ››› page 117. Howev-er, the symbols indicating the respective po-sitions of the controls remain the same.

WARNING

Never drive with only the side lights on! Theside lights are not bright enough to illumi-nate the road ahead and to ensure that otherroad users are able to see you. Always useyour dipped beam headlights if it is dark or ifvisibility is poor.

CAUTION

● Use the lights in line with local law.

● However, drivers always remain responsi-ble for correctly adjusting and using thelights.

Note

● An audible warning will be heard when thelight control is set to and you remove the

ignition key and open the door. Once thedriver door is closed (ignition off), the audi-ble warning will stop, whereas the side lightswill remain on to light up the stationary vehi-cle in case this is necessary.

● Depending on weather conditions (cold orwet), the lights may mist up temporarily onthe inside. This is particularly the case in theevent of a difference in temperature betweenthe inside and in front of the light. By switch-ing on the lights, the area through which thebeam of light is projected will quickly bedemisted, although the edges may remainmisted. The real lights and turn signals canmist up. This has no influence on the usefullife of the lighting system.

Control lamps

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 120.

It lights up

Front fog lights* switched on ››› page 120.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signalis faulty ››› page 118.

116


It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 118.

It lights up

Bulb failure ››› page 83For example, the information display indicates:Check front right dipped headlight!

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNING


Note

The rear side lights and number plate lightcontain several bulbs. The control lamp lights up only when there is a fault in all thenumber plate bulbs or side light bulbs (of acombined tail light). Therefore it is advisableto regularly check the bulb operation.

Side light and dipped beam headlight

Fig. 129 Instrument panel: light control.

Switching on side lights

– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position.

Switching on dipped beam

– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position.

Switching off lights (except daytime drivinglights)

– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position0.

Main light range control

Fig. 130 Instrument panel: light range con-trol.

– Turn the control ››› Fig. 130 to set the lightsto the required setting.

Positions

The control positions roughly correspond tothe following vehicle load conditions.

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty.

All seats occupied, luggage compartmentempty.

All seats occupied, luggage compartmentfully loaded.

Driver only, luggage compartment fullyloaded.

CAUTION

Always adjust the range of the lights so that: »

-

1

2

3

117

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Your vehicle does not dazzle others, partic-ularly oncoming traffic

● The range of the headlights is sufficient forsafe driving

Note

Make sure you set the range of the mainlights when the dipped beam headlights areswitched on.

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights are signalling devicesfor improving road safety. The lights are builtinto the headlights and come on each timethe ignition is turned on if the light switch isin position 0 or ››› Fig. 129. It is automat-ically switched off when the side lights areturned on.

Switching the daytime driving lights on

● Remove the key from the ignition, move theturn signal lever upward (right turn signal),press it back to flash position and hold itthere.

● Insert the key and switch on the ignition,holding it in this position for 3 seconds.Then, switch off the ignition. The daytimerunning light is now activated and the corre-sponding lights can come on.

Switching the daytime running light off

● Remove the key from the ignition, press theturn signal lever down (left turn signal), pressit back to flash position and hold it here.

● Insert the key and switch on the ignition,holding it in this position for 3 seconds.Then, switch off the ignition. The daytimerunning light is now deactivated and the cor-responding lights cannot come on.

OR: activate and deactivate the daytimelights using the Easy Connect system››› page 21.

Automatic control of the dipped beam incombination with the daytime running lights

If the dipped beam control and the daytimerunning lights are activated at the sametime, the dipped beams and the instrumentpanel lighting will automatically come on asrequired (e.g. when entering a tunnel) andthe daytime running lights will switch off.When the automatic dipped beam controlswitches off the dipped beams (e.g. whencoming out of a tunnel), the daytime runninglights come back on.

WARNING

The rear lights do not come on with the day-time driving light. A vehicle which does nothave the rear lights on may not be visible toother drivers in the darkness, if it is rainingor in conditions of poor visibility.

Note

Please observe any relevant legal require-ments which may apply in your country.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 131 Turn signal and main beam lever.

The turn signal and main beam lever also op-erates the parking lights and the headlightflasher.

Right and left-hand turn signal

● Move the lever ››› Fig. 131 up 1 or down2 .

● Keep the lever held down at the point of re-sistance for the turn signals to flash for aslong as you hold the lever, e.g. when chang-ing lanes.

118


Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The convenience turn signals are activatedand deactivated in the Easy Connect systemvia the key and the Setup function button››› page 99.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

Main beams

● Switch on the dipped beam ››› page 117.

● Press the lever ››› Fig. 131 forward in the di-rection indicated by arrow 3 .

● Pull the lever back to its original position inthe direction indicated by arrow 4 to switchthe main beam off.

Headlight flasher

● Pull the lever ››› Fig. 131 towards the steer-ing wheel (point of resistance) in the direc-tion indicated by arrow 4 .

Parking lights

● Instructions for use ››› page 121.

CAUTION

Never use the main beam headlights or theheadlight flasher if they could dazzle otherdrivers.

Note

● If the convenience turn signals are operat-ing (three flashes) and the other convenienceturn signals are switched on, the active partstops flashing and only flashes once in thenew part selected.

● The turn signals only work when the igni-tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-ing lamp or flashes in the general instru-ment panel.

● The turn signals switch off automaticallywhen the steering wheel is returned to thestraight-ahead position.

● If a turn signal bulb is defective, the controllamp flashes at double speed.

Automatic dipped beam control

If the light switch is in this position ››› Fig. 129, the side lights, headlights andthe number plate lights will turn on or off au-tomatically.

The light is adjusted according to the data re-corded by the light sensor that is installedbetween the windscreen and the inside rearview mirror.

If the light switch is in position , the sym-bol located next to the light switch will il-luminate. If the light illuminates automatical-ly, symbol located next to the light switchwill also illuminate.

Automatic headlights in case of rain

If the light switch is in position and isconnected to the automatic wipe in case ofrain for more than 10 seconds or wipe (posi-tion 2 or 3 ) for longer than 15 seconds,››› page 125 then the side lights and head-lights will automatically switch on.

The light automatically switches off if morethan 4 minutes have elapsed and the auto-matic wipe or wipe (position 2 or 3 ) havenot been switched on.

CAUTION

Do not cover the windscreen light sensor withstickers or similar objects; this could impairoperation.

119

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Front fog lights*

Fig. 132 Instrument panel: light switch.

Switching on front fog lights

– First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132 to po-sition , or .

– Pull on the light switch to position 1 .

The warning lamp lights up on the generalinstrument panel if the front fog lights areswitched on.

Front fog lights with cornering func-tion*

3 Not valid for vehicles fitted with Full-LED lights

Front fog lights with cornering function pro-vide better lighting of the area around the carwhen driving through a corner or parking,etc.

Front fog lights with cornering functionswitch on depending on how far you turn thesteering wheel or whether or not the turn sig-nals1) are switched on, if the following condi-tions are met:● The vehicle is stationary, the ignition isswitched on or you are moving at a speed ofless than 40 km/h (25 mph);

● The daytime driving light is switched off

● The dipped beam is switched on

● The fog lights are switched off

● Reverse gear is not engaged

Rear fog light

Switching on the rear fog light

– First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132››› page 120 to position , or .

– Pull on the light switch to position 2 .

If the vehicle is not equipped with front foglights ››› page 120, the rear fog light isswitched on by turning the switch to position or and pulling it to position 2 . Thistype of switch only has one position.

The ››› page 98 warning lamp lights up onthe general instrument panel if the rear foglights are switched on.

If you are towing a trailer or caravan equip-ped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with afactory-fitted towing bracket or one installedusing parts from the original SEAT partscatalogue, only the rear fog light on the trail-er or caravan will light up.

1) In the event of a conflict between both functions,i.e. if you turn the steering wheel to the left while theright-hand turn signal is on, the turn signals will takepriority.

120


Function “Coming Home”/“LeavingHome”*

This function makes it possible, under poorvisibility conditions, to automatically turn onthe lights for a brief period of time after thevehicle has been parked or when approach-ing the vehicle.

The function is automatically turned on if thefollowing conditions are met:

● The light switch is in position ››› page 119.

● The visibility around the vehicle is reduced.

● The ignition is switched off.

To turn on this function, switch on the head-light flasher prior to exiting the vehicle.

The light is adjusted according to the data re-corded by the light sensor that is installedbetween the windscreen and the inside rearview mirror.

The function automatically turns on the sidelights and headlights, the lighting for the en-try area on the exterior mirrors and the num-ber plate light.

“Coming Home” function

The light is automatically switched on whenthe driver door is opened (for 60 seconds af-ter the ignition is switched off).

The lights is switched off when all the doorsand the boot lid are closed.

If a door or the boot lid remains open, thelight will switch off after 60 seconds.

“Leaving Home” function

The light is automatically switched on whenthe vehicle is unlocked using the remote con-trol.

The light is switched off after 10 seconds orwhen the vehicle is locked.

Hazard warning lights switch

Fig. 133 Instrument panel: switch for hazardwarning lights.

– Press the button ››› Fig. 133 to switchthe hazard warning lights on or off.

The warning lamps on the instrument paneland the warning lamp on the switch will flash

at the same time as the turn signals whenthe hazard warning lights are switched on.The hazard warning lights also work whenthe ignition is switched off.

The hazard warning lights come on automati-cally in the event of an accident in which anairbag is triggered.

Note

Switch on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users, for example:

● When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam

● if the vehicle has a technical fault or youare involved in an emergency situation.

Parking lights*

Parking lights


– Move the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 131››› page 118 up or down to turn on the rightor left-hand parking lights respectively.

Parking light on both sides

– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 ››› page 117 to position and engage thesteering lock. »

121

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● The parking lights can only be activatedwith the ignition disconnected.

● The parking light will not come on automat-ically after switching off the ignition if theleft- or right-hand turn signal is left on.

Adjusting the headlights

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the headlightbulbs with stickers or to change the adjust-ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth-er drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution.This is known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-LED headlights of the SEAT Toledo allows thespecific “tourist light” values to be met with-out the need for stickers or changes in thesettings.

Note

“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a country thatdrives on the other side, you should take thevehicle to an Authorised Technical Service tochange the headlights.

Interior lights

Interior lighting

Fig. 134 Interior lighting – version 1.

Fig. 135 Interior lighting – version 2.


Where the courtesy light is on (switch A

››› Fig. 134 in position ), the light will comeon if:● the vehicle is unlocked,

● one of the doors is opened,

● The key is removed from the ignition

When the courtesy light is on (switch A inposition ), the light will switch off if:● the vehicle is locked,

● the ignition is switched on,

● 30 seconds after all of the doors have beenclosed

If a door is left open or if switch A is in the position, the interior lighting switches offafter about 10 minutes to prevent the batteryfrom running flat.

122


Rear interior light

Fig. 136 Rear interior light.

Press the button ››› Fig. 136 to switch thelighting on or off.

Interior lights / ambient light*

When the dipped beam is on the ambientlighting lights up the central console area,the door handles, the storage pockets in thefront doors, the footwell area and the instru-ment panel trim.

The lighting of the central console area andthe footwell area will switch on fully when thedoors are opened and will decrease in inten-sity while driving with the dipped beamheadlights on.

The intensity of the ambient light* can be ad-justed using the menu Easy Connect >

Lighting settings > Vehicle inte-rior lighting ››› page 21.

Glove box light

The light will come on automatically whenthe glove compartment is opened. The lightwill go out when the glove compartment isclosed.

Luggage compartment light

The light switches on automatically when theboot is open and switches off automatically10 minutes after the boot lid has beenopened.

Visibility

Heated rear window

Fig. 137 Heated rear window switch.

– Switch the heated rear window on or off bypressing the button ››› Fig. 137, thewarning lamp in the button will come on orgo off respectively.

The heated rear window only works when theengine is running.

After approximately 7 minutes, the heatingdevice of the rear window switches off auto-matically.


The heated rear window should be switchedoff as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-ing electrical power you can also save fuel››› page 162. »

123

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-board systems, the heated rear windowswitches off automatically to ensure enoughpower to control the engine ››› page 214, Au-tomatic disconnection of electrical equip-ment.

Sun visors

Fig. 138 Driver's sun visor.

Fig. 139 Front passenger's sun visor.

The sun visors for the driver and the frontpassenger can be pulled out of their centralsupports and turned towards the doors in thedirection of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 138 and 2

››› Fig. 139 respectively.

The strip A is to store small objects such asnotepaper, etc.

The front passenger sun visor includes a van-ity mirror B with a cover. The cover isopened by sliding it in the direction indicatedby arrow 3 ››› Fig. 139.

WARNING

Do not turn sun visors with attached objectssuch as ball-pens, etc. toward the head pro-tection airbag triggering zone on the sidewindows. The head protection airbags couldinjure occupants if triggered.

Windscreen wipers and wind-screen washers

Introduction

The windscreen wipers and windscreenwashers only work when the ignition isswitched on.

The speed of the automatic wipe in case ofrain is automatically adjusted according tothe intensity of the rainfall.

The rear window is wiped once if the wind-screen wipers are switched on and reversegear is engaged.

Fill the windscreen washer fluid ››› page 210.

WARNING

● Make sure the blades ››› page 53 are inperfect condition for good visibility and safedriving.

● In cold conditions, you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you have warmedthe windscreen with the heating and ventila-tion system. The windscreen washer fluidcould otherwise freeze on the windscreen andobscure your view of the road.

CAUTION

● During winter, always check that the wind-screen wiper blades are not frozen to theglass before each trip or before switching onthe ignition. If you switch on the windscreenwipers when the wiper blades are frozen tothe glass, this could damage both the wiperblades and the wiper motor.

● If the ignition is switched off when thewindscreen wipers are on, they will start op-erating in the same mode when the ignitionis switched back on. The wiper blades may befrozen to the glass at low temperatures whenthe ignition is switched off.

● Carefully separate the frozen wipers fromthe windscreen or rear window.

124


● Remove snow and ice from the wipers be-fore starting your journey.

● Careless handling could lead to the wiperarms damaging the windscreen.

● For safety reasons, the wiper blades shouldbe changed once or twice a year. They can bepurchased at a SEAT Authorised Service.

● The ignition cannot be switched on whilethe windscreen wiper arms are in a raised po-sition. Otherwise, the windscreen wiperswould return to their original position andcould damage the paintwork on the bonnet.

Note

Keep the wipers clean. The wipers can besoiled with remains of wax solutions from carwashes ››› page 194.

● On vehicles equipped with windscreenwasher jets, these are heated once the en-gine is running.

Operating windscreen wipers andwashers

Fig. 140 Window wiper lever.

Short wipe

– Give the windscreen a brief wipe by movingthe lever down to position 4 ››› Fig. 140.

Wipe intervals/automatic wipe in case of rainrain sensor*

– Push the lever up to position 1

››› Fig. 140.

– With switch A , adjust the wipe interval orrain sensor sensitivity.

Switch A has 4 positions.

The rain sensor* is part of the intermittentwipe function.

The rain sensor* controls the frequency ofthe windscreen wiper intervals, dependingon the amount of rain.

Slow wipe


››› Fig. 140.

Continuous wipe


››› Fig. 140.

Automatic windscreen wash and wipe

– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel,position 5 ››› Fig. 140, and the windscreenwasher and wipers are switched on.

– Release the lever. The washer will stop andthe windscreen wipers will keep running for1-3 wipes (depending on the windscreenwasher operating time).

Rear window wiper*

– Press the lever forward to position 6

››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper willrun every 6 seconds.

Automatic rear window wash and wipe*

– Press the lever fully forward to position 7

››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper andwasher switch on at the same time.

– Release the lever. The rear window washerwill stop and the rear window wipers willkeep running for 1-3 wipes (depending onthe jet operating time). When released, thelever remains in position 6 . »

125

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Switching off the wipers

– Move the lever to position 0 ››› Fig. 140.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.

● If necessary, switch on the wipers manuallywhen water on the windscreen obstructs visi-bility.

Note

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in frontof the rain sensor*. This may cause sensordisruption or faults.

Headlight washers*

The headlight washers operate briefly if thedipped headlights or headlights are on andthe lever is moved to position 5 ››› Fig. 140.The headlight washer system also operatesevery 10 windscreen wash cycles.

Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from theheadlights at regular intervals, for instancewhen filling the fuel tank. Please observe thefollowing indications ››› page 196, Head-lights.

To ensure the system works properly in win-ter, keep the nozzle holders free of snow andremove any ice with a de-icer spray.

CAUTION

Never pull on the nozzle holders. Risk ofdamage to the system!

Mirrors

Rear view mirror with manual anti-dazzle device

Basic settings

– Push the lever at the bottom of the mirrorforward.

Rear vision mirror anti-dazzle setting

– Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to-wards you.

Exterior mirrors


Before beginning any journey, adjust the rearview mirrors for a good rear visibility.

WARNING

● Convex (wide-angle) rear vision mirrors givea larger field of vision. However, they makeobjects appear smaller and further away thanthey really are. For this reason, you should

not rely on these rear vision mirrors for judg-ing the distance of vehicle behind.

● If possible, use the interior rear vision mir-ror to estimate distances to vehicles behindyou.

Note

● Exterior mirrors are only heated when theengine is running.

● Do not touch the exterior mirrors when theheating system is running.

● If the electrical adjustment should ever failto operate, the rear vision mirrors can be ad-justed by hand by pressing the edge of themirror glass.

● Visit the technical service in the event of afault in the electrical rear vision mirror ad-justment system.

126

Seats and head restraints


Adjusting seats and head re-straints

Introduction


Set the driver seat in such a way that thepedals can be fully depressed with your legsslightly bent.

Set the driver seat backrest so that you canreach the upper point of the steering wheelwith your arms slightly bent.

The correct seat position is very importantfor:● reaching all of the controls safely andquickly,

● a relaxed posture that will not produce fati-gue,

● maximum protection from the seat beltsand airbag system

WARNING

● Adjust the driver seat only when the vehi-cle is stationary. Risk of accident!

● Be careful when adjusting the front seats!Careless and uncontrolled adjustment cancause injuries.

● The backrests must not be reclined too farback while driving. This could limit the effectof the seat belts and the airbag system. Riskof injury!

● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.

● Every occupant in the vehicle must properlyfasten and wear the seat belt belonging tohis or her seat. Children must be protectedwith an appropriate child restraint system››› page 72, Transporting children safely.

● The front seats, head restraints and seatbelts must always be adjusted to the size ofthe vehicle occupant to provide you and yourpassengers with the greatest possible protec-tion.

● Your feet should remain in the footwellwhile the vehicle is moving; never rest themon the dash panel, on the window or on theseat! This also applies to passengers. An in-correct sitting position exposes you to an in-creased risk of injury in case of a suddenbraking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-gered, you could sustain severe injuries dueto an incorrect sitting position!

● It is important for the driver and front pas-senger to keep a distance of at least 25 cmfrom the steering wheel and dash panel. Fail-ure to respect the minimum distance meansthat the airbag will not protect you. Risk offatal injury if triggered!

● Objects must not be placed in the footwell,as they could move to the area of the pedalsin the event of a braking manoeuvre orchange of direction. This would prevent the

clutch, brake or accelerator from being press-ed.

● Do not place any items on the front passen-ger seat other than those allowed (e.g. childseat). Risk of accident!

Note

After a certain time, the backrest angle ad-justment mechanism may gain a certainamount of play.

127

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

head restraints

Fig. 141 Front head restraint: adjust or re-move.

Fig. 142 Rear centre head restraint: releasepoint.


Head restraints cannot be moved up or downor removed on sports seats.

Fitting and removing head restraints on frontseats

– Push the head restraint up as far as it willgo.

– Press catch 1 ››› Fig. 141 and remove thehead restraint.

– To refit, insert the head restraint into theholes in the backrest, pushing it down untilit engages.

Fitting and removing head restraints on rearseats

To remove the head restraint, the correspond-ing backrest must be partially folded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 130

– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-rives to the top.

– Press button 1 ››› Fig. 142, while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2

››› Fig. 142 with a flat screwdriver a maxi-mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrestraint.

– To refit, insert the head restraint into theholes in the backrest, pushing it down untilit engages.

For maximum head restraint protection, ad-just the head restraint so that its upper edgeis at the same level as the top of your head.

The head restraint must be adjusted in linewith the height of users. Correct adjustmentof the head restraint, together with the seatbelts, ensure effective passenger protection››› page 56.

WARNING

● Badly adjusted head restraints increase therisk of injuries in the event of an accident.

● Never drive with the head restraints re-moved. Risk of injuries!

● If the seats are in use, never drive with therear head restraints in their out-of-use posi-tion.

Seat functions

Heated front seats*

Fig. 143 Heated front seats.

128


The cushion and backrest of the front seatscan be heated electrically.

Press the or ››› Fig. 143 button to switchon and adjust the heated front seats.

Press once to connect the heating at maxi-mum force.

Press the button again to reduce the force ofthe heating and switch it off. The force is indi-cated by the number of warning lamps lit onthe button.

WARNING

Do not use the heated seat if your perceptionof pain and/or temperature or that of yourpassenger is limited, e.g. due to medication,paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes). Itcould cause burns on the back, buttocks andlegs that are difficult to heal. If you still wantto use the heated seat, take frequent breakson long journeys so that the body can recoverfrom the trip. Ask your doctor about your par-ticular situation.

CAUTION

● To avoid damaging the heating elements,do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pres-sure at a single point to the seat cushion orbackrest.

● Do not use the heated seats if nobody issitting on them or if there are items attachedto or lying on them, such as a child seat or a

bag, etc. This could lead to a fault in the seatheating elements.

● Do not clean the seats with anything damp››› page 197.

Note

● Only connect the heated seats when theengine is running. This provides considerablesavings on the battery capacity.

● In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-board systems, the heated seats switch offautomatically to ensure enough power to con-trol the engine ››› page 214, Automatic dis-connection of electrical equipment.

Armrest on front seats with inner stor-age*

Fig. 144 Armrest/Opening and closing thestorage compartment.

Adjusting armrest height

– Lift the armrest as far as it will go and thenfold it downward. »

129

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

– Raise the armrest until it engages in one ofthe 5 positions.

Opening storage compartment

– Press the button located on the front of thearmrest ››› Fig. 144 - .

– Lift the storage compartment lid ››› Fig. 144- .

Armrest on rear seats

Fig. 145 Rear seats: armrest.

The armrest can be folded away for greatercomfort using the handle ››› Fig. 145.

Folding down the backrest

Fig. 146 Unlocking the backrest.

Folding

– Before folding the rear seats, adjust the po-sition of the front seats so that the rearseats are not damaged. When the frontseats are adjusted to the rear position,their head restraints should be removedbefore folding the backrests on the rearseats. Store the removed head restraints in

such a way that they cannot be soiled ordamaged.

– Insert the seat belt latch plate into hole A

››› Fig. 146 located on the correspondingside of the vehicle – safety position.

– Press the lock button B to unlock thebackrest and fold it forward.

Returning to the initial position

– Where the head restraint has been re-moved, insert it into the backrest when par-tially raised.

– Push the backrest backwards to its originalposition until the lock button engages –check that it is locked by pulling on thebackrest ››› .

– Make sure the red protruding part C is notvisible.

WARNING

● Once the backrests have been lifted, theseat belts and their buckles must be in theirinitial position – ready for use.

● The backrests must be safely locked to en-sure any items in the boot cannot movearound the interior of the vehicle in the eventof a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of inju-ries!

● Make sure the rear backrests are correctlylocked. Only then will the three-point auto-matic seat belt on the rear central seat workcorrectly.

130

Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION

Take care when handling the rear backrestsso as not to damage the seat belts. The seatbelt must never be left behind the lifted back-rest.

Transport and practicalequipment

Practical equipment

Passenger side storage compartment

Fig. 147 Instrument panel: passenger sideglove compartment.

Fig. 148 Storage: cooling control.

Opening and closing passenger side glovecompartment

– Pull the catch on the lid in the direction in-dicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 147 and openthe lid.

– Close the lid and push it until it engages.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CDplayer is located in the glove compartment.Separate operating instructions are enclosedfor this equipment in the corresponding In-struction Manual.

Glove compartment cooling*

Open or close the air outlet by turning thethumbwheel ››› Fig. 148.

If the air outlet is open and the air condition-ing is on, the cooled air will be released intothe glove compartment.

If the air outlet is open and the air condition-ing is off, outdoor air (not conditioned) willbe released into the glove compartment.

The air outlet should be closed if the air con-ditioning is being used in heating mode orwhere glove compartment cooling is not inuse.

WARNING

● For safety reasons, all storage compart-ments must be closed while the vehicle ismoving. »

131

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Never place any objects on the instrumentpanel. These objects could be flown aroundthe interior while the vehicle is moving (onaccelerating or turning) and distract you. Riskof accident!

● Make sure objects remain in the centre con-sole or other compartments while the vehicleis moving. Otherwise, this could prevent youfrom braking, changing gear or accelerating.Risk of accident!

Note

The glove compartment can hold a bottle nolarger than 1 litre.

Storage compartment for reflectivevest

Fig. 149 Driver's seat: storage compartment

There is a compartment below the driver seat››› Fig. 149 to store the reflective vests.

WARNING

The compartment is solely designed to storethe reflective vest and no other objects. Ob-jects falling out of the storage compartmentcould limit or prevent use of the pedals.

CAUTION

The compartment is solely designed to storethe reflective vest and no other objects, sincethere is a risk of damaging the storage com-partment.

Storage pocket under the front seats

There is a storage pocket on the rear part ofthe backrest of the front seats.

These pockets are designed to hold maps,magazines, etc.

WARNING

Do not place heavy objects in the pockets.Risk of injury!

CAUTION

Do not place overly large objects in the pock-ets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp edges.Risk of damage to the pockets and the up-holstery.

Drink holder in the centre console

Fig. 150 Centre console: drink holder

Front drink holder in the centre console

Rear drink holder in the centre console

WARNING

● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.They could spill while the vehicle is moving.Risk of scalding!

A

B

132


● Do not use cups or glasses made of fragilematerials (e.g. glass or china). These couldcause injury in the event of an accident.

CAUTION

Avoid putting open drinks containers in thedrink holder while the vehicle is moving.They could spill (e.g. on braking) and causedamage to the electrical equipment or theseat covers.

Drink holder in rear seat armrest

Fig. 151 Rear seats armrest: drink holder

Two drinks can be placed in the drink holder.

Use the detachable parts A and B

››› Fig. 151 to change the size of the holes.

– Remove part A or B in the direction indi-cated by the arrow and replace in the re-quired position in the drink holder.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 152 Centre console: lighter

The cigarette lighter is located at the front ofthe centre console ››› Fig. 152.

Using the cigarette lighter

– Press the cigarette lighter knob ››› Fig. 152.

– Wait for the lighter to spring out.

– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light thecigarette on the glowing coil immediately.

– Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.

WARNING

● Take care when using the cigarette lighter!Carelessness or negligence when using thecigarette lighter can cause burns and seriousinjuries.

● The cigarette lighter also works when theignition is off and when the ignition key is re-

moved. Therefore, never leave children unsu-pervised in the vehicle.

Note

● The 12 V power socket of the cigarettelighter can also be used as a power source forelectrical appliances ››› page 134, 12V Powersocket.

● Additional information ››› page 192, Acces-sories and modifications to the vehicle.

133

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Ashtrays*

Fig. 153 Centre console: front ashtray/rearashtray.

Removing the ashtray

– Pull the ashtray ››› Fig. 153 upwards to re-move.

Inserting the ashtray

– Push the ashtray down.

WARNING

Never put flammable materials in the ashtray.Risk of fire!

CAUTION

Never hold onto the ashtray by the lid whenremoving it. Risk of breaking the lid.

12V Power socket

Fig. 154 Centre console: 12 V power socket.

The 12 V power socket is located at the frontof the centre console ››› Fig. 154.

Using the power socket

– Open the cover or remove the cigarettelighter concealing the socket.

– Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the socket.

Additional information ››› page 192, Acces-sories and modifications to the vehicle.

WARNING

● Improper use of the sockets or electricalappliances can cause a fire and lead to burnsand other serious injuries.

● Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. The 12 V power socket is also func-tional when the ignition is switched off andthe key is removed.

● Should the connected appliance overheat,immediately switch it off and disconnect itfrom the socket.

CAUTION

● The 12 V power socket can only be used topower appliances with a power rating of up to120 watts.

● Never exceed the maximum permitted pow-er, as this could cause damage to the vehicleelectrical installation.

● With the engine switched off, however, thevehicle battery will drain. Risk of dischargingthe battery!

● Only use suitable plugs so as not to dam-age the power socket.

● Only use appliances that have been testedfor electromagnetic compatibility in compli-ance with current regulations.

● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-plug the appliances from the power socket to

134


protect them from any damage caused byfluctuations in voltage.

● Follow the instructions for use of connectedappliances!

Multimedia compartment

Fig. 155 Front centre console: multimediacompartment.

The multimedia compartment is in the stor-age compartment of the front centre console››› Fig. 155.

The compartment can be used to hold mobilephones, mp3 players or similar devices.

WARNING

Never use the multimedia compartment as anashtray or to store flammable materials. Riskof fire!

Storage compartment for glasses*

Fig. 156 Close-up of roof panel: storage com-partment for eyeglasses.

– Press the compartment lid and it will dropdown ››› Fig. 156.

WARNING

This compartment must only remain openwhen removing or replacing glasses.

CAUTION

● Do not place heat-sensitive objects in thecompartment as they could be damaged.

● The side compartment supports a maxi-mum load of 0.25 kg.

Coat hooks*

The coat hooks are located on the B-pillarsand on the handles on the interior liningabove each rear door.

WARNING

● Make sure that any items of clothing hang-ing from the coat hooks do not obstruct yourview to the rear.

● Only use the coat hooks for light items ofclothing and make sure that there are noheavy or sharp objects in the pockets.

● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up theclothing, as this could interfere with the func-tion of the head-protection airbags.

CAUTION

The side hooks support a maximum load of 2kg.

135

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Front seat backrest net pockets

Fig. 157 Front seats backrests: net pockets.

There are net pockets on the inside part ofthe front seats backrests ››› Fig. 157.

These pockets are designed to hold light-weight objects such as a mobile phone or anmp3 player.

WARNING

● Do not exceed the maximum load that thenet pockets can support. Heavy objects can-not be safely secured. Risk of injuries!

CAUTION

● The net pockets support a maximum load of150 g.

● Do not place overly large objects in thepockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharpedges. Risk of damage to the pockets.

Compartments in the centre console

Fig. 158 Centre console: storage compart-ment

Open storage compartment in centre console››› Fig. 158.

Storage compartment in front door

Fig. 159 Storage compartment in door trim.

There is a bottle carrier in part B ››› Fig. 159of the storage compartment in the front door.

WARNING

Only use part A ››› Fig. 159 of the compart-ment in the front door to store objects that donot protrude from it so as not obstruct the de-ployment area of the side airbags.

Storage compartment in the luggagecompartment*

Fig. 160 Luggage compartment: storage com-partment

The lid from the side storage compartmentcan be removed to increase the size of theboot.

– Hold onto the top of the lid and pull it outin the direction indicated by the arrow››› Fig. 160.

136


CAUTION

● The compartments are designed to holdsmall objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg.

● Make sure you do not damage the storagecompartment or the boot trim when using thecompartment.

Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must besafely secured in the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forthcould impair the driving safety or drivingcharacteristics of the vehicle by shifting thecentre of gravity.

– Distribute the load evenly in the luggagecompartment.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-ble in the luggage compartment.

– Place the heavy objects first.

– Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings››› page 137.

WARNING

● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-gage compartment could cause serious inju-ries.

● Always stow objects in the luggage com-partment and secure them on the fasteningrings.

● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-jects.

● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,loose objects can be thrown forward, injuringvehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-creased risk of injury will be further increasedif a loose object is struck by an inflating air-bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjustyour speed and driving style accordingly, toavoid accidents.

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights orallowed maximum weight. If said weights areexceeded, the driving characteristics of thevehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-juries and damage to the vehicle.

● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-cially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. Close and lock all the doors andrear lid when you leave the vehicle. Beforeyou lock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

Note

● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reducefogging of the windows. Used air escapesthrough ventilation slits in the side trim ofthe luggage compartment. Ensure that theventilation slots are never covered.

● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available.

Fastening rings*

There can be four fastening rings in the lug-gage compartment for fastening luggage andother objects.

– Always use suitable and undamaged strapsto secure luggage and other objects to thefastening rings ››› in Loading the lug-gage compartment on page 137.

– Pull up the fastening rings to attach thestraps.

During a collision or an accident, even smalland light objects can build up so much ener-gy that they can cause very severe injuries.The amount of kinetic “energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and the weight ofthe object. The most significant factor, how-ever, is the speed of the vehicle.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lyingunsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this »

137

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

object generates a force corresponding to 20times its weight. That means that the effec-tive weight of the object increases to approxi-mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity ofthe injuries which might be sustained if this“object” strikes an occupant as it fliesthrough the interior of the vehicle. This in-creased risk of injury will be further increasedif a loose object is struck by an inflating air-bag.

WARNING

● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se-cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-ate or damaged retaining cords, injuriescould result in the event of braking manoeu-vres or accidents.

● Never secure a child seat on the fasteningrings.

Luggage compartment

Introduction

Please observe the following points to ensurethe vehicle handles well at all times:

– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.

– Place heavy objects as far forward in theluggage compartment as possible.

– Secure luggage using the fastening rings orretaining net ››› page 139.

During an accident, even small and light ob-jects can have so much kinetic energy thatthey can cause very severe injuries. Theamount of kinetic energy depends on thespeed of the vehicle and the weight of theobject. However, the speed of the vehicle isthe most important factor.

Example: An unsecured object weighing 4.5kg produces energy corresponding to 20times its weight in a frontal collision at 50km/h (31 mph). This means that its weightreaches around 90 kg. You can imagine theseverity of the injuries that might be sus-tained if this “projectile” strikes an occupantas it flies through the vehicle interior.

WARNING

● Store objects in the luggage compartmentand secure to the fastening points.

● In an accident or sudden manoeuvre, looseobjects in the interior can be flung forwardand possibly injure vehicle occupants or oth-ers. This risk is even greater if the flying ob-jects hit a triggering airbag. In this case, anyrebounding objects could injure vehicle occu-pants. Risk of fatal injuries!

● Take into account that transporting heavyobjects changes the centre of gravity thatcould also cause changes in vehicle handling.Risk of accident! Therefore, always adjustyour speed and driving style to suit these cir-cumstances.

● Securing the load to the rings using unsuit-able or damaged straps could lead to injuriesin the event of an accident or sudden brakingmanoeuvre. Secure suitable straps safely tothe rings to ensure this does not happen.

● Position the load so it cannot move forwardduring a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk ofinjuries!

● If transporting sharp or dangerous objectsin the space provided when the rear seats arefolded, ensure the safety of the occupant ofthe remaining rear seat ››› page 58.

● If the rear seat located alongside a foldedseat is occupied, ensure safety, for example,by placing the load so that it stops the seatfrom folding backward in the event of beinghit from behind.

● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into theinterior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al-lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!

● Never transport passengers in the luggagecompartment!

CAUTION

Make sure sharp objects stored in the bootcannot not damage the rear window heatingfilaments.

138


Note

Tyre pressure must be adapted to suit theload ››› page 216, Useful life of tyres.

Category N1 vehicles

Category N1 vehicles with no protection grillemust use a retaining set compliant withStandard EN 12195 (1 – 4) to secure theload.

Retaining elements*

Fig. 161 Luggage compartment: retaining el-ements.

The following retaining elements are fitted inthe boot ››› Fig. 161:

Rings to secure the load and the retain-ing nets.

Rings used solely for the retaining nets.

A

B

CAUTION

The rings support a maximum load of 3.5 kN(350 kg).

Note

The front ring B is below the folding back-rest of the rear seats ››› Fig. 161.

Hook*

Fig. 162 Luggage compartment: hook.

There are hooks on both sides of the boot tosecure light items of luggage such as bags,etc. ››› Fig. 162.

CAUTION

The side hooks support a maximum load of7.5 kg.

Retaining nets*

Fig. 163 Retaining nets.

Fig. 164 Retaining nets.

Example of securing retaining nets››› Fig. 163 and ››› Fig. 164.

Sideways bag

Ground net

Lengthways bag »

A

B

C

139

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximum load that thenets can support. Heavy objects cannot besafely secured. Risk of injury!

CAUTION

● The retaining nets support a maximum loadof 1.5 kg.

● Do not place any item with sharp edges inthe net. Risk of damaging the net!

Rear shelf

Fig. 165 Remove the shelf.

Fig. 166 Remove the shelf.

The shelf can be removed if a large load is tobe transported.

Removing the shelf

– Remove the straps from the shelf 1

››› Fig. 165.

– Remove the shelf from its housing 2 byknocking it gently from underneath be-tween the supports.

Fitting the shelf

– Place the shelf on the side supports on thetrim.

– Adjust the shelf supports 3 ››› Fig. 166 tofit the supports 2 in the trim.

– Fit into place by knocking the top of theshelf gently between the supports.

– Attach the straps 1 to the tray.

WARNING

Do not place objects on the rear shelf thatcould endanger the vehicle occupants in caseof a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci-dent.

CAUTION

● The rear shelf supports a maximum load of1 kg.

● If handled incorrectly, the tray could bendon closing the rear lid and become damagedor damage the trim. Follow the instructionsbelow:

– The shelf supports 3 ››› Fig. 166 must besecurely in place in the trim supports 2 .

– The size of the load must not exceed theheight of the shelf.

– When open, the shelf must not be bentagainst the shelf seal.

– There must be no objects in the space be-tween the open shelf and the backrest ofthe rear seat.

Note

The shelf will lift when the rear lid is opened.

140


Roof rack*

Introduction

WARNING

● The load on the roof carrier must be proper-ly secured. Risk of accident!

● Always secure the load using retainingstraps that are in good condition.

● Distribute the load evenly.

● When transporting heavy or large objectson the roof, any change in normal vehicle be-haviour due to a change in the centre of gravi-ty or increased wind resistance must be takeninto account. Risk of accident! For this rea-son, speed and driving style must be adjus-ted for the situation.

● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking.

● Adjust your driving style to suit visibility,the weather and road and traffic conditions.

● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al-lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

● Only use SEAT-authorised roof carriers.

● Where roof carriers from other systems areused or where they are not fitted properly,any damage caused to the vehicle will not becovered by the warranty. Therefore, carefullyfollow the Instruction Manual for installationof the roof carrier.

● Remember that the rear lid must not hit theroof load.

● The total height of the vehicle increases ac-cording to the roof load. Compare the heightof the vehicle with the heights of bridges orother underpasses, for example, the heightof the garage door.

● Do not forget to remove the roof carrier be-fore entering an automatic carwash.

● Take into account that the load must notdamage the aerial located on the roof.


If aerodynamic resistance increases, fuel con-sumption will also increase.

Attachment points

Fig. 167 Basic roof carrier attachment points.

Location of the basic roof carrier attachmentpoints ››› Fig. 167:

Rear attachment points

Front attachment points

Install and remove following the instructionsgiven. »

A

B

141

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

CAUTION

Follow the instructions given in the manual.

Roof load

The maximum permissible roof load (includ-ing the support system) of 75 kg and the to-tal authorised weight of the vehicle must notbe exceeded.

It will not be possible to carry the full maxi-mum load if the roof carrier you are using israted for a load which is less than this figure.In this case, you can only load the roof carrierto the maximum load permitted in your in-stallation manual.

Air conditioning

Heating and air conditioning

General notes

The power of the heating depends on thetemperature of the coolant. Therefore, maxi-mum power is only obtained when the en-gine has reached operating temperature.

The temperature and humidity of the air in-side the vehicle decrease when the coolingsystem is turned on. This therefore increasesthe comfort of all vehicle occupants whenoutside temperatures and humidity are high.It also helps prevent the windows from mist-ing over during cold periods of the year.

The air recirculation system can be switchedon temporarily to increase the cooling effect.

Keep the air intake slots in front of the wind-screen clear of ice, snow or leaves to ensureunimpaired heating and cooling.

When the air conditioning is on, condensa-tion can drip from the evaporator in the aircooling system and form a pool underneaththe vehicle. This is normal and does not indi-cate a leak!

WARNING

● All windows must be clear of ice, snow andcondensation for driving safety. Therefore,

make sure you familiarise yourself with thecorrect use of heating and ventilation, win-dow demisting and defrosting and cooling.

● Never use the air recirculation system fortoo long, as it prevents fresh air from enter-ing the vehicle and used air can cause tired-ness, reduce your attention span and causethe windows to mist over. This increases therisk of an accident. Switch off the air recircu-lation system as soon as the windows beginto mist over.

WARNING

Do not switch off Climatronic for longer thannecessary.

● Switch Climatronic back on as soon as thewindows begin to mist over.

Note

● Used air escapes through ventilation slotsin the rear of the luggage compartment.

● Smoking is not recommended while the airrecirculation system is in use, as the smokedrawn from the interior of the vehicle settlesin the evaporator of the air conditioning sys-tem. This causes a persistent, unpleasantsmell while the system is running that istime-consuming and expensive (evaporatorreplacement) to eliminate.

● To guarantee proper operation, never coverthe air outlets in the luggage compartment.

142

Air conditioning

Economic use of the air-conditioningsystem

When the air conditioning is switched on, thecompressor consumes engine power and hasinfluence on fuel consumption.

If the vehicle interior has overheated due toexcessive solar radiation, it is best to openthe windows or doors to allow the hot air toescape.

While in motion, the air conditioning shouldnot be switched on if the windows are open.

If the interior temperature can be reachedwithout switching on the air conditioning, thefresh air mode should be used.


Saving fuel reduces emissions.

Faults

If the air conditioning does not work at out-side temperatures above +5°C (+41°F) then

the system is faulty. This may be due to oneof the following reasons:● One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuseand replace if necessary ››› page 80.

● The air conditioning compressor hasswitched off temporarily because of in-creased engine coolant temperature››› page 97.

If you cannot repair the fault yourself orwhere cooling power continues to drop,switch off the system. Contact a specialisedservice.

Air vents

Fig. 168 Air vents

Opening air vents 3 and 4

– Turn the vertical circular control upwards. »143

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Closing air vents 3 and 4

– Turn the vertical circular control down-wards.

Changing the direction of air delivery fromair vents 3 and 4

– The air circulation height can be varied bychanging the position of the sliding adjust-er upwards or downwards ››› Fig. 168.

– The air circulation direction can be variedby changing the position of the sliding ad-juster to the right or to the left.

The flow of air from the vents is controlled us-ing control C ››› Fig. 169. Vents 3 ››› Fig. 168and 4 can be opened and closed individually.

Depending on the position of the adjustersand on the weather, open vents can provideair which is either heated, unheated orcooled.

Heating and fresh air

Operation

Fig. 169 Heating: controls.


Temperature selection

– Turn rotary control A ››› Fig. 169 clockwiseto increase the temperature.

– Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re-duce the temperature.

Blower selection

– Turn rotary control B ››› Fig. 169 to posi-tion 1 to 4 to switch the blower on.

– Turn rotary control B to position 0 toswitch the blower off.

– Press button 1 ››› in Air recirculation on page 145 to close the fresh air vent.

Air distribution selection

– Turn rotary control C ››› Fig. 169 to selectthe air vents ››› page 143, Air vents youwish to activate.

All controls, except control B ››› Fig. 169,can be set to any intermediate position.

Leave the blower activated at all times to pre-vent the windows from misting over.

Note

If the system is set so that all of the air isused to defrost the windows, no air is sup-plied to the footwell area. This could limitheating comfort.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,e.g. when passing through a tunnel or inqueuing traffic, from entering the interior.

If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 169 is in thethaw position, the recirculation flap will al-ways be open (button light off).

If the rotary switch C is switched from anyposition to the thaw position, recirculationwill be automatically deactivated.

144

Air conditioning

Connecting the recirculation

In any position of rotary switch C exceptthaw:

● Press button 1 ››› Fig. 169, the switch'slamp will light up, indicating that air recircu-lation inside the vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculation


● Press button 1 again and the button'slamp will go off, indicating that air recircula-tion from the outside has been activated.

In the thaw position of rotary switch C , theentry of air into the vehicle interior is alwaysfrom the outside.

WARNING

Read and observe the safety warnings ››› inGeneral notes on page 142.

Air conditioning (manual)*

General notes

The air cooling system only works if A/C but-ton 2 ››› Fig. 170 ››› page 145 is pressedand under following conditions:● The engine is running,

● The outside temperature is above +2°C(+36°F),

● The blower control is in position 1–4.

When the cooling system is on and under cer-tain conditions, air can be blown from thevents at a temperature of approximately +5°C(+41°F). In the event of prolonged, irregulardistribution of the air flow from the outletsand significant differences in temperature,e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive peoplemay catch cold.

Note

A visit to the specialised service once a yearis recommended to clean the air conditioningsystem.

Manual operation

Fig. 170 Air conditioning: controls.


Temperature selection

– Turn rotary control A ››› Fig. 170 clockwiseto increase the temperature.

– Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re-duce the temperature.

Blower selection

– Turn rotary control B ››› Fig. 170 to posi-tion 1 to 4 to switch the blower on.

– Turn rotary control B to position 0 toswitch the blower off.

– Press button 1 ››› page 146, Air recir-culation to close the fresh air vent.

Air distribution selection

– Turn rotary control C ››› Fig. 170 to selectthe air vents ››› page 143 you wish to acti-vate.

Switching cooling on and off

– Press the button A/C 2 ››› Fig. 170 andthe lamp in the button will illuminate.

– Press the A/C 2 button again and thelight in the button will switch off. »

145

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Coldest setting

– On turning control A to the coldest setting(blue indicator), buttons 1 and 2

A/C , light up

– The recirculation function is activated auto-matically in order to cool faster.

Note

● If the air distribution is directed towardsthe windows, all, of the heating power isused to defrost the windscreen. No warm airis directed to the footwell area. This couldlimit heating comfort.

● The AC button lamp will illuminate afterthe system has been switched on, even if notall of the conditions for cooling system oper-ations are met. Cooling is indicated as availa-

ble once all of the conditions are met››› page 145, General notes.

Air recirculation


If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 170 is in thethaw position, the recirculation flap will al-ways be open (button light off).

If the rotary switch C is switched from anyposition to the thaw position, recirculationwill be automatically deactivated.

Connecting the recirculation


● Press button 1 ››› Fig. 170, the switch'slamp will light up, indicating that air recircu-lation inside the vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculation


● Press button 1 again and the button'slamp will go off, indicating that air recircula-tion from the outside has been activated.

In the thaw position of rotary switch C , theentry of air into the vehicle interior is alwaysfrom the outside.

WARNING


146

Air conditioning

Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)

General notes

Fig. 171 Climatronic: controls.


Climatronic automatically maintains a com-fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-cally regulates the supplied air temperatureand the blower and air distribution levels.The system also allows for the effect of sun-light, so there is no need for manual adjust-ment. It also has a humidity sensor thathelps to automatically demist the wind-screen.

Automatic operations ››› page 148 guaran-tee maximum comfort any time of year.

Climatronic description

Cooling only works if the following conditionsare met:

● The engine is running

● the outside temperature is above +2°C(+36°F);

● A/C 18 ››› Fig. 171 switched on.

Starting the Climatronic

The corresponding function will be switchedon when a button is pressed, turning on theair conditioning if it was switched off, withthe exception of button 17 ››› Fig. 171 (recir-culation).

Switching off the Climatronic

● Turn control 10 to the left until the seg-ments of column 9 ››› Fig. 171 switch off.

● After 1 second has elapsed, turn the controlagain to switch off the display.

In order to ensure engines subject to heavyloads are cooled, the air conditioning com-pressor is switched off in the event of highcoolant temperatures.

Recommended setting for all seasons of theyear

● Set the required temperature. We recom-mend +22°C (72°F). »

147

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Press the AUTO button 13 ››› Fig. 171.

● Adjust vents 3 and 4 ››› page 143 so thatthe air flow is directed slightly upwards.

Change between degrees Centigrade and de-grees Fahrenheit

Keep the AUTO and A/C ››› Fig. 171 buttonsheld down for 2 seconds at the same time.The data is displayed on the screen in theunits required.

Note

● A visit to the specialised service once ayear is recommended to clean the Climatronicsystem.

● The interior temperature sensor 11

››› Fig. 171 is at the bottom. Do not cover itwith stickers or the like, as this could have anegative effect on Climatronic operations.

Automatic mode

Automatic mode is used to maintain a con-stant temperature and demist the windowsinside the vehicle.

Switching on automatic mode

● Set the interior temperature between +16°C(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).

● Adjust vents 3 ››› page 143 and 4 so thatthe air flow is directed slightly upwards.

● Press the AUTO button 13 ››› Fig. 171 andAUTO displayed on the screen.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressingthe air distribution buttons or increasing ordecreasing the blower speed. However, thetemperature remains regulated.

Adjusting the temperature

● When you switch on the ignition, control 1

››› Fig. 171 can be used to set the required in-terior temperature.

It is possible to select interior temperaturesfrom +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In thisrange the temperature is regulated automati-cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) isselected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If atemperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected,“HI” is displayed on the screen. At both ex-tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool-ing or heating power, respectively. The tem-perature is not regulated.

In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-larly the footwells) and significant differen-ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi-cle, sensitive people may catch cold.

Air recirculation


Switching on air recirculation mode

● Press button 17 ››› Fig. 171 and the symbol is displayed on the screen.

Switching off air recirculation mode

● Press button 17 ››› Fig. 171 and the symbol disappears from the screen.

WARNING


Note

If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 mi-nutes, the symbol will start to flash onthe screen to indicate prolonged air recircula-tion. If air recirculation is not switched off,the symbol will continue to flash for about 5minutes.

Blower selection

Climatronic automatically regulates blowerspeed according to the interior temperature.

148

Driving

It is possible, however, to set the blowerspeed to suit requirements.

● Turn control 10 ››› Fig. 171 counter-clock-wise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to in-crease the speed).

Climatronic will switch off when the blowerswitches off.

WARNING


Windscreen defrost

Switching on windscreen defrosting

● Press the button 12 ››› Fig. 171.

Switching off windscreen defrosting

● Press button 12 ››› Fig. 171 severaltimes or press the AUTO button.

The temperature is regulated automatically.The air output is increased from vents 1››› page 143 and 2.

Driving

Starting and stopping the en-gine

Introduction


WARNING

● When moving with the engine switched off,the ignition key must always remain in posi-tion 2 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151 (ignition on).The control lamps will light up in this posi-tion. Otherwise, the steering lock could en-gage suddenly. Risk of accident!

● Do not remove the key from the ignition un-til the vehicle has come to a standstill and issecure (e.g. the handbrake is engaged). Oth-erwise, the steering lock could suddenly en-gage. Risk of accident!

● Always take the ignition key with you whenyou leave the vehicle. This is particularly im-portant if you leave children in the vehicle.Children could, for example, start the enginewith the subsequent risk of accident.

● Never leave the engine running in unventi-lated or closed rooms. The exhaust gasescontain carbon monoxide, an odourless andcolourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-dents! Carbon monoxide can cause people tolose consciousness and can cause death.

● Never leave the vehicle unattended if theengine is running.

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle has come to a complete stop. Risk of acci-dent!

CAUTION

● Turning the steering wheel fully in eitherdirection when the vehicle is stationary andthe engine is in gear puts the power steeringunder great stress. This could lead to noise.Never leave the steering wheel turned fully ineither direction for more than 15 seconds.Risk of damage to the power steering system!

● The starter motor may only be used (keyposition 3 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151 in the ig-nition) if the engine is off. Using the startermotor when the engine is running could dam-age it.

● Immediately release the ignition key whenthe engine starts, otherwise damage could becaused to the starter motor.

● When the engine is cold, you should avoidhigh engine speeds, driving at full throttleand over-loading the engine before it reachesoperating temperature. Risk of engine dam-age!

● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of enginedamage! In vehicles with a catalytic convert-er, fuel that has not been burned could reachthe catalytic converter and catch fire in it.This would lead to a fault in the catalytic con-verter. You may use the battery from another »

149

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

vehicle to help you start your engine››› page 51.

● After prolonged and demanding operationof the engine, when the journey has ended,do not stop the engine immediately. Let theengine run at idle for about one more minute.This will stop the engine from overheating.


Do not warm up the engine when the vehicleis stationary. If possible, move off immediate-ly after starting the engine. This will help theengine reach operating temperature morequickly, reducing the quantity of emissions.

Note

● The engine can only be started with theoriginal SEAT key.

● Loud running noises may be heard brieflyafter cold-starting the engine. This is normaland is no cause for concern.

● After the engine has been stopped and theignition switched off, the radiator fan maycontinue running for around 10 minutes.

● If the engine still does not start after a sec-ond attempt, the fuel pump fuse might haveblown. Check it and replace if necessary››› page 80 or contact your Specialised Serv-ice.

● You should always engage the steering lockwhen you exit the vehicle. This will hinderany attempts at theft.

Power steering

The power steering allows you to turn thesteering wheel more easily.

If the power steering fails or the engine is off(towing), it is still possible to turn the vehi-cle's steering wheel fully. However, you needmore strength to steer the vehicle.

Driver warning lamps and messages

(in red) Faulty steering! Topark the vehicle

If the warning lamp remains on and the driverindication appears, the power steering couldbe faulty.

Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as-sistance.

(in yellow) Steering: Systemfault! You may continue driving.

If the warning lamp comes on, the steeringcould react with more difficultly or more sen-sitivity than normal. In addition, when drivingin a straight line the steering wheel may beoff-centre.

Drive slowly to a specialised workshop andhave the fault repaired.

(in yellow) Steering lock:fault! Go to an Official Service

The electronic steering lock is malfunction-ing.

Go to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and have the fault repaired.

WARNING

Take it immediately to a specialised work-shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci-dent!

Note

If the lamp (in red) or else (in yellow)lights up briefly, you may continue driving.

Start-up lock security system (immo-biliser)

There is an electronic chip in the key. Theelectronic immobiliser is deactivated whenthe key is inserted into the ignition. The elec-tronic immobiliser is automatically activatedwhen the key is removed from the ignition.

The engine will not start if an unauthorisedkey is used.


Immobiliser active!

150

Driving

Ignition lock

Fig. 172 Ignition key positions.

Petrol engines

1 – Ignition switched off, engine stopped,steering can be locked

2 – Ignition switched on

3 – Starting

Diesel engines

1 – Fuel supply stopped, ignition switchedoff, engine stopped, steering can be locked

2 – Engine pre-heating, ignition switchedon

3 – Starting

To engage the Steering lock without the keyin the ignition, turn the steering wheel slight-ly until you hear it engage.

If the steering lock is engaged and it is diffi-cult or impossible to turn the key to position

2 , release the lock by turning the steeringwheel slightly in both directions.

Starter button

Fig. 173 In the steering column: start-uppush button for the Keyless Access lock andstart-up system. The layout in right-handdrive vehicles is symmetrical.

Fig. 174 Emergency ignition in vehicles withKeyless Access.

The start-up button may only be used if thereis a valid key in the vehicle.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off

● Briefly push the start-up button ››› Fig. 173without touching the brake or clutch ped-al ››› .

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low orflat: »

151

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Immediately after pushing the start-up but-ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steeringcolumn ››› Fig. 174.

● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not stop after briefly press-ing the start-up button, an emergency dis-connect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec-ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds››› .

● The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicleafter the engine stops, you will only have 5seconds to restart it. A warning will displayon the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key insidethe vehicle.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle couldresult in serious injury.

● When pressing the start-up button, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, this way theengine will start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.

● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-ised person could lock the vehicle, start theengine or connect the ignition and, in thisway, operate electronic equipment (e.g. thewindows).

Note

In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Accesssystem, there may be a delay in the enginestarting if it requires preheating.

Starting the engine

Vehicles with a diesel engine are equippedwith a glow plug system. When you switch onthe ignition, the glow plug warning lamp will light up. The engine can be startedstraight away when the lamp switches off.

Do not connect electrical appliances duringpreheating so as not the drain the vehiclebattery unnecessarily.

Starting the engine

● Move the gearbox lever into neutral ormove the selector lever to position P or N andpull firmly on the handbrake.

● Press the clutch pedal all the way downand start the engine 3 ››› Fig. 172››› page 151, without pressing the accelera-tor. Keep the clutch pedal pressed down untilthe engine starts.

● Release the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts. The key returns to position 2 .

● If the engine does not start after 10 sec-onds, turn the key back to position 1 . Re-peat the action after 30 seconds.

● Release the handbrake before moving off.

Switching off the engine with the key

Stop the engine by turning the ignition key toposition 1 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151.

Brakes and brake servo sys-tems

Introduction

WARNING

● The brake servo only works when the en-gine is running. Braking when the engine isswitched off requires applying more strengthto the brake pedal. Risk of accident!

● Press down on the clutch pedal when stop-ping and braking with a manual gearbox,

152

Driving

petrol engine vehicle at low speed. Other-wise, the brake servo might not work proper-ly. Risk of accident!

● In the event of damage to the standardfront spoiler or where a different front spoil-er, wheel trims, etc. are subsequently fitted,make sure the air vent to the brakes on thefront wheels is not blocked. Otherwise, brak-ing operations may be impaired. Risk of acci-dent!

● Always fully release the handbrake. If it isonly partially released, this will cause over-heating of the rear brakes, which can impairthe function of the brake system. Risk of acci-dent!

● Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could release the handbrake ormove the gear lever. The vehicle could startmoving. Risk of accident!

● Insufficient fuel can cause the engine to runirregularly or to switch off. Brake assist sys-tems could be impaired. Risk of accident!

● Always adjust your driving style to suit visi-bility, the weather and road and traffic condi-tions. The best vehicle safety offered bybrake assist systems must never encourageyou to run greater risks. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

● Observe the information concerning newbrake pads ››› page 161.

● Where braking is not necessary, do notwear down the brake pads by pressing down

gently on the brake pedal. This causes thebrakes to overheat, increasing their wear andincreasing braking distances.

● To ensure the brake assist systems workproperly, all wheels must be fitted with tyresapproved by the manufacturer.

Note

● If you brake suddenly and the brake systemcontrol unit regards the situation as hazard-ous for the drivers behind you, the brakelights will begin to flash automatically. Afterreducing speed to approximately 10 km/h (6mph) or stopping the vehicle, the brake lightswill stop flashing and the hazard warninglights will switch on. The hazard warninglights are automatically switched off whenyou accelerate or restart the vehicle.

● On long, steep gradients, reduce yourspeed and change to a lower gear (manualgearbox) or move the selector lever to a lowergear position (automatic gearbox). This usesthe force of the engine and the brakes do notsuffer as much. If you still have to brake, doso intermittently, pressing down repeatedlyon the brake pedal.

● Vehicle modifications (e.g. to the engine,brakes, frame or a combination of wheels andtyres) could impair the brake assist systems››› page 192, Accessories and modificationsto the vehicle.

● In the event of a fault in the ABS system,the ESC, TCS and EDL are switched off auto-

matically. A fault in the ABS is indicated bythe ››› page 155 warning lamp.

Control lamp

The warning lamp illuminates if the brakefluid level is too low or if there is a fault in theABS system.


Brake fluid Instruction Manual!Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andcheck the level of the brake fluid››› page 209

WARNING

● The following indications must be taken in-to account when opening the engine com-partment to check the brake fluid››› page 202, Engine compartment.

● If the warning lamp illuminates togetherwith the warning lamp ››› page 155, ,stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service.

● A fault in the brake system or in the Anti-lock brake system (ABS) can lead to longerbraking distances – Risk of accident!

153

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Brakes

Wear

The rate of wear of the brake pads dependson the driving style and on the way in whichthe vehicle is used. The brake pads will wearmore quickly if you use your vehicle frequent-ly in urban traffic and short trips or drive in asporty style. Under these demanding condi-tions, visit your specialised service, even be-fore the scheduled service date, so that thethickness of the brake pads can be meas-ured.

Wet roads or road salt

If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driv-ing on roads which have been gritted withsalt, braking power may set in later than nor-mal. Dry the brakes as soon as possible bybraking repeatedly.

Corrosion

Long periods of inactivity and little use canlead to rust on the brake discs and dirt on thebrake pads. Where the brake system is sub-jected to light stress or in the case of corro-sion, clean the brake discs by braking fullyseveral times at a high speed.

Brake system fault

If you notice that the braking distance sud-denly increases and the brake pedal can bepressed down more fully, there may be a fault

in the brake system. Visit a specialised serv-ice immediately and adjust your driving styleto the extent of the damage and to limit theeffect of the brakes.

Low brake fluid level

Insufficient brake fluid could cause faults inthe brake system. The brake fluid level is con-trolled electronically ››› page 153, Controllamp.

Brake servo

The brake servo supplements the pressureyou exert on the brake pedal. The brake servoonly works when the engine is running.

Handbrake

Fig. 175 Centre console: handbrake.

Applying the handbrake

– Pull the handbrake lever up all the way.

Releasing the handbrake

– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly andpress the unlock button at the same time››› Fig. 175.

– Keep the button pressed down and pushthe lever all the way down.

Control lamp

The warning lamp lights up when the hand-brake is applied with the ignition on .

Additionally, driving the vehicle at speeds ex-ceeding 6 km/h (4 mph) for at least 3 sec-onds produces an audible warning.


Release the handbrake!

Braking and stability systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC system increases control of the vehi-cle in emergency situations, e.g. during asudden change in direction. Depending onthe driving conditions, it reduces the risk ofskidding and increases driving stability.

The system uses the steering wheel angleand road speed to calculate the changes ofdirection desired by the driver, and constant-ly compares them with the actual behaviourof the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for

154

Driving

example, if the vehicle begins to skid, theESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-cally.

The warning lamp on the general instru-ment panel starts flashing when the systemis working.

The stability (ESC) system includes the fol-lowing systems:● Anti-lock brake system (ABS),

● Traction control system (TCS),

● Electronic differential lock (EDL),

● Hydraulic brake assist system (HBA),

● Hill hold control (HHC).

The ASR should be switched on at all times.Only under certain circumstances should thesystem be switched off, e.g.● driving with chains,

● driving in deep snow or on very soft surfa-ces,

● During the “swinging movement” requiredto remove a stuck vehicle

Switch the ASR back on as soon as possible.

Brake assist system (HBA)*

The HBA system is activated when you pressdown on the brake pedal suddenly. It increa-ses braking power, helping to reduce brakingdistances. To reduce braking distance asmuch as possible, keep the brake pedal

pressed down firmly until the vehicle comesto a standstill.

With the help of this system, the ABS is acti-vated more quickly and more efficiently.

The brake assist function is deactivated auto-matically when the brake pedal is released.

Hill hold control (HHC)*

The HHC system makes it easier to start thevehicle on hills. The system maintains thebrake pressure created by pressing down onthe brake pedal for 2 seconds after it hasbeen released. Your foot can be removedfrom the brake pedal and you can use the ac-celerator pedal and move away on a hill with-out having to use the handbrake. The brakepressure drops as the accelerator pedal ispressed. If the vehicle cannot be started, itwill start to move backwards after 2 seconds.

The HHC is activated on gradients of over5%, if the driver door is closed. It only worksfor starting on hills, moving both forward andin reverse. It is not activated during start-updown hill.

Control lamp

If the control lamp flashes, the ESC isworking.

If the warning lamp illuminates on igni-tion, the ESC system may have switched offdue to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition

and turn it on again. Upon switching on theignition again, if the warning lamp hasswitched off, this means the ESC is function-ing correctly again.

If the warning lamp is illuminated there isa fault in the ESC.


Report No.: electronic stabilitycontrol (ESC)

or

Report No.: Traction controlsystem (ASR)

Go to a technical service.

Note

If the battery is disconnected and connectedagain, the yellow warning lamp lights upwhen the ignition is switched on. This warn-ing lamp must switch off after covering ashort distance.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS system prevents the wheels lockingduring braking. This helps the driver keepcontrol of the vehicle.

The driver is made aware of ABS assistanceby the pulsating of the brake pedal and acharacteristic noise. »

155

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Keep the brake pedal pressed down while theABS is working. The ABS will switch off whenthe brake pedal is released. Never brake in-termittently while the ABS is working!

Control lamp

If the warning lamp is illuminated, there isa fault in the ABS.


ABS faultThe brake system alone is operational in thevehicle, without ABS.


WARNING

● If the warning lamp illuminates togetherwith the ››› page 153 warning lamp, ,stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service.

● A fault in the Anti-lock brake system (ABS)can lead to longer braking distances – Risk ofaccident!

Anti-slip regulation of the drivingwheels (ASR)*

If the wheels start to slip, the TCS adapts theengine speed to the driving conditions. Par-ticularly in unfavourable conditions, the TCShelps starting, accelerating and hill starts.

If the control lamp flashes, the ASR isworking.

If the warning lamp illuminates on igni-tion, the TCS system may have switched offdue to technical reasons. Turn off the ignitionand turn it on again. Upon switching on theignition again, if the warning lamp hasswitched off, this means the TCS is function-ing correctly again.

If the warning lamp remains illuminated,there is a fault in the TCS.


Report No.: Traction controlsystem (ASR)


Electronic differential lock

If one of the wheels starts to skid, the EDLbrakes that wheel, transmitting the drivingforce to the other wheels. This increases ve-hicle stability and improves driving stability.

To prevent the disc brake of the brakingwheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.The vehicle will continue to function normallywithout EDL. The EDL will switch on again au-tomatically when the brake has cooled down.

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 176 Gear shift diagram of a 5- or 6-speedmanual gearbox


When changing gear, always depress theclutch pedal fully and keep it pressed downto avoid excessive clutch wear.

In order to drive at an optimum RPM, followthe gear change indications ››› page 25.

Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle isstopped. On engaging reverse gear while theengine is running, first wait a moment withthe clutch pedal pressed down fully to limitgear shift noise.

The reverse lights switch on when the reversegear is selected and the ignition is on.

156

Driving

WARNING

Never engage reverse gear when moving for-ward. Risk of accident!

Note

Do not rest your hand on the gear lever whiledriving. The pressure of your hand could leadto premature wear of the gear system.

Automatic gearbox

Basic information

The gearbox changes up and down automati-cally. The gearbox can be set to Tiptronicmode. The gears can be changed manually inthis mode ››› page 159.

The engine can only be started in positions Por N. If, on engaging the steering lock,switching the ignition on/off or starting theengine, the selector lever is not in these posi-tions, the informative display will show Movethe selector lever to positionP/N!, or P/N is shown on the generaldash panel display.

At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the en-gine can only be started in position P.

Move the selector lever to position P whenparking the vehicle on a flat surface. On aslope, the handbrake should be firmly ap-

plied before moving the selector lever to thepark position. This reduces the load on thelock mechanism while making it easier tomove the selector lever from position P.

If, while the vehicle is moving, the selectorlever is accidentally moved to position N, re-lease the accelerator and wait for the engineto idle before moving it back into position.

WARNING

● Never press the accelerator when selectingthe automatic gearbox operating mode whenthe vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident!

● Never move the selector lever to positionsR or P when driving. Risk of accident!

● If the vehicle is to be stopped with a gearselected and the engine idling (e.g. waitingor moving slowly at traffic lights), press downon the brake pedal because the transmissionis not entirely interrupted when the engine isidling and the vehicle will tend to start mov-ing.

● Apply the handbrake firmly and put the se-lector lever in position P before opening thebonnet and working on the vehicle with theengine running. Risk of accident! Strictly fol-low the safety instructions ››› page 202, En-gine compartment.

● When stopping on a slope (hill), try not tostop the vehicle from moving by pressing the“accelerator” with a gear selected. This couldoverheat the clutch. If the clutch risks beingburnt due to this force, it would switch off

and the vehicle could move backwards. Riskof accident!

● If you have to stop on a hill, press down onthe brake pedal to stop the vehicle from mov-ing.

● The drive wheels could lose traction on aslippery road surface when the kick-downfunction is activated. Risk of sliding!

CAUTION

● In DSG automatic gearboxes, the doubleclutch is protected from overloads. If the hillhold control is used, the clutches are subjec-ted to greater force if the vehicle is at astandstill on a slope or suddenly acceleratingon a slope.

● Should the clutches overheat, the sym-bol is shown on the informative display witha warning message Gear overheated.Stop! Instruction Manual! An audiblewarning is also heard. Stop the vehicle in thiscase, stop the engine and wait until the sym-bol has switched off. Danger of damage tothe gearbox! You can continue driving oncethe symbol is switched off.

Starting and driving

Starting

– Press and hold the brake pedal.

– Press and hold the interlock button on theselector lever knob and move the selector »

157

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

lever to position ››› page 158 before releas-ing the interlock button.

– Release the brake and press the accelera-tor.

Stopping

– The selector lever does not have to bemoved to position N if the vehicle is stop-ped for a short period, e.g. at intersections.Applying the brake is enough. However, theengine must remain idling.

Parking

– Press the brake pedal.

– Apply the handbrake.

– Press the interlock button, move the selec-tor lever to position P and release the but-ton.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

In any gear programme, press down fully onthe accelerator for the automatic gearbox toactivate the kick-down feature. This functiontakes priority over the gear programmes with-out taking into account the position of the se-lector lever (D, S or Tiptronic) and is used toreach maximum acceleration, using full en-gine power. Depending on the road speedand engine speed, the automatic gearbox

shifts down and the vehicle accelerates. Itonly shifts up after the maximum enginespeed has been reached.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 177 Gear selector lever

Fig. 178 Informative display: selector leverpositions.


The current position of the selector lever isshown on the general instrument panel dis-play 1 ››› Fig. 178.

P – Parking position

In this position, the driven wheels are me-chanically locked.

The parking position can only be selectedwhen the vehicle is stationary.

If you want to move the selector lever fromthis position, press the interlock button onthe selector lever knob while pressing downon the brake pedal.

If the battery is drained, the selector levercannot be moved from position P.

R – Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when thevehicle is stationary and the engine is idling.

To move the selector lever to position R frompositions P or N, press the interlock buttonon the selector lever knob and press down onthe brake pedal.

The reverse lights come on when the selectorlever is in position R and the ignition is on.

N – Neutral (idling)

Neutral (idling) is engaged in this position.

To move the selector lever from position N (ifthe lever has remained in this position for

158

Driving

more than 2 seconds) to position D or R atspeeds of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) andwhen the vehicle is stationary, press down onthe brake pedal.

D – Drive (forwards)

In this position, the gearbox automaticallychanges to a lower or higher gear, dependingon engine requirements, the driving speedand the gear shift programme.

To move the selector lever to position D fromposition N at speeds of less than 5 km/h (3mph) and when the vehicle is stationary,press down on the brake pedal.

In some situations (e.g. on mountain roads orwhen towing a trailer or caravan), it can beadvantageous to switch temporarily to themanual shift programme ››› page 159 so thatthe gear ratios can be selected manually tosuit driving conditions.

S – Sports driving position

Shifting up later than usual makes full use ofthe engine power. This shifts down earlier inrelation to position D.

To move the selector lever to position S fromposition D, press the interlock button on theselector lever knob.

Tiptronic

Fig. 179 Selector lever: Tiptronic.

The Tiptronic gearbox allows the driver tochange gears manually using the selectorlever.

Activating the manual gearbox

– From position D, push the selector lever tothe right. The selected position of the se-lector lever is shown on the general instru-ment panel display together with the gearengaged 1 ››› Fig. 178.

Shifting up

– Push the selector lever gently forwards +

››› Fig. 179.

Shifting down

– Push the selector lever gently backwards- ››› Fig. 179.

The manual gearbox can be activated whenthe vehicle is either moving or stationary.

When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-ly shifts up shortly before the maximum en-gine speed is reached.

On shifting up, the gear is only engagedwhen there is no risk of engine damage.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed downto the kick-down zone, the gearbox will shiftdown in line with the road speed and enginespeed.

Note

The kick-down function is also available inmanual shift mode.

Selector lever lock

Automatic selector lever lock

The selector lever is locked in the positions Pand N when the ignition is on. Press down onthe brake to unlock it. Remember, if the se-lector lever is in positions P and N, the warn-ing lamp will light up on the general in-strument panel.

When the selector lever merely movesthrough position N (e.g. when moved from Rto D), the lever lock is not applied. Thismakes it possible, for example, to rock astuck vehicle backwards and forwards. The »

159

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

lock is only applied if the brake is not press-ed and the selector lever is moved to positionN for more than 2 seconds.

The selector lever only locks when the is vehi-cle stationary or driving at a speed lowerthan 5 km/h (3 mph). At a higher speed, itautomatically disconnects in the N position.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector leverknob prevents the driver from inadvertentlyengaging a gear. Press the button to unlockthe selector lever.

Safety interlock for ignition key1)

After switching off the ignition, you can onlyremove the ignition key if the selector lever isin position P. When the ignition key is re-moved, the selector lever is locked in posi-tion P.

Driving programmes

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly-controlled automatic gearbox. Shifting upor down depends on the programme selec-ted.

For a calm driving style, the gearbox uses themost economic programme. The gearbox

shifts up as quickly as possible and shiftsdown as late as possible, thus increasingdriving economy.

With a sporty driving style, characterised bysudden acceleration, heavy acceleration,speeds that often increase and decrease andmaximum speed, the gearbox adapts to thisdriving style when the accelerator is presseddown fully (kick-down) by shifting down asquickly as possible and can even shift downby several gears at once.

Selecting the best driving programmes is anendless job. Regardless of this, the driver canalso make the gearbox switch to a more dy-namic gear shift programme by pressing theaccelerator quickly. This makes the automaticgearbox shift down into a lower gear than theone that would normally apply to the currentspeed, allowing for more rapid acceleration(e.g. to overtake another vehicle) withouthaving to press the accelerator until the kick-down position. On shifting up in a corre-sponding driving style, the gearbox returns tothe original programme.

When driving along mountain roads, thegearbox adapts to the gradients. This avoidshaving to frequently change gears when driv-ing uphill. In Tiptronic mode, it is possible toshift down manually when driving downhill touse the braking effect of the engine.

Backup programme

A back-up programme exists in case of faults.

In the event of a fault in the gearbox electron-ics, it will continue to work in one of the cor-responding back-up programmes. All seg-ments of the screen are lit up or switched off.

The fault can be seen as follows:● The gearbox only engages certain gears

● Reverse gear R cannot be engaged

● The manual gearbox switches off in theback-up programme

Note

If the gearbox switches to the back-up pro-gramme, visit an Authorised Service as soonas possible to solve the problem.

Gearbox malfunctions

Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-hicle and place the lever in theposition P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

1) Valid only for certain countries.160

Driving

Gearbox: System fault! Youmay continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! Youcan continue driving with re-strictions. Reverse gear disa‐bled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! Youcan continue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well awayfrom moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake andengage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with ahigh temperature, this driver message will bedisplayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Run-in and economical driving

The first 1,500 km

Over the first 1,500 kilometres the enginemust be run in.

Up to 1000 kilometres

– Do not drive at more than 3/4 of the maxi-mum speed corresponding to the engagedgear, i.e. up to 3/4 of the maximum permit-ted engine speed.

– Do not drive at full speed.

– Avoid high engine speeds.

– Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900miles)

– Slowly increase the engine speed untilreaching the maximum permitted speed ofthe engaged gear, i.e. the maximum per-mitted engine speed.

During its first few hours of running, the in-ternal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on, when all the moving parts have bed-ded in. How the vehicle is driven over approx-imately the first 1,500 kilometres (900miles), determines the success of the proc-ess of running in the engine.

Even after running in, the vehicle should notbe unnecessarily driven at high enginespeeds. The maximum permitted enginespeed is marked at the start of the red zoneon the rev counter dial. The gear must bechanged up when the red area is reached invehicles with a manual gearbox. Extremelyhigh engine speeds when accelerating areautomatically limited, however the engine isnot protected against high engine speedsproduced by incorrectly changing to a lowergear, which could cause the engine to run atrevs above the maximum permitted amount,and consequently result in damage to the en-gine.

Additionally, vehicles with a manual gearboxmust also bear the following in mind: do notdrive with the engine speed too low. Changedown to a lower gear when the engine nolonger runs smoothly. Observe the recom-mendations for changing gear››› page 25.

New tyres

New tyres must be submitted to “running in”,given that initially their grip is not yet at themaximum level. During the first 500 km (120miles) drive very carefully.

New brake pads

New brake pads do not yet provide maximumfriction capacity. First they must be “run in”. »

161

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

During the first 200 km (120 miles) drive verycarefully.

CAUTION

All the information for speed and enginespeed refers to an engine that operates at op-erating temperature. Do not run the engine athigh engine speeds, neither when stopped orwhile driving.


Do not drive at unnecessarily high enginespeeds; changing to a higher gear soonercontributes to saving fuel, reduces operatingnoise and protects the environment.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recy-cling

● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling

● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling

● Increased use of single-grade materials.

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials

● Use of recycled materials.

● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.

● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.

● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.

● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.

● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.

● Use of solvent-free adhesives.

● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.

● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).

● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).

● The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally-friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-pends in large part on your driving style. Byadopting an economical driving style and an-ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you caneasily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-tion while saving money are listed below.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.When you anticipate situations, you have tobrake less often and, thus, accelerate less. Ifit is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gearengaged, for example, if you see a red lightahead. The braking effect achieved in thisway helps to reduce the wear of brakes andtyres; emissions and fuel consumption arereduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-tia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to changeup quickly through the gears. Running the

162

Driving

engine at high rpm in the lower gears usesan unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to secondgear as soon as possible. We recommendthat, whenever possible, you change to ahigher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Followthe “recommended gear” indication that ap-pears on the instrument panel››› page 25.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speedpermitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Drivingat moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the enginewhen waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross-ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds isgreater than the amount of fuel needed to re-start the engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high dur-ing this initial warm-up phase. It is thereforebest to drive off immediately after startingthe engine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,before beginning a journey, you will not con-sume more than the required amount of fuel.A well-serviced engine gives you the benefitof improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission ofpolluting exhaust gases, the engine and theexhaust gas filtration systems should reachthe optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption isproportionally higher. The engine does notwarm up and fuel consumption does not nor-malise until having driven approximately fourkilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom-mend avoiding short trips whenever possi-ble.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad-equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) toolow, fuel consumption can increase by asmuch as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wearwear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checkedwhen the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as theyincrease fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisableto always check the luggage compartment tomake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sakeof convenience, even when it is no longerneeded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will useabout 12% more fuel as a result of the extrawind resistance caused by the roof rack evenwhen it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, whichproduces electricity. With the need for elec-tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-ces when you do not need them. Examples ofdevices that use a lot of electricity are: thefan at high speeds, the rear window heatingand the seat heaters*.

Note

● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-ommended to switch this function off. »

163

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● It is recommended that you close the win-dows when driving at more than 60 km/h(37 mph)

● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, as the pressure can make theplate spin, more fuel will be used and it canburn the clutch plate lining, causing a seriousfault.

● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with theclutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, us-ing the latter to start. The fuel consumptionwill be lower and you will prevent the clutchplate from being damaged.

● On descents, use the engine brake, chang-ing to the gear that is more suitable for theslope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” andthe brakes will not suffer.

Engine management and ex-haust gas purification system

Introduction

WARNING

● Because of the high temperatures whichcan occur in the exhaust purification system(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-haust can come into contact with flammablematerials under the car (e.g. on grass or atthe forest edge). Fire hazard!

● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Note

While the control lamps , , or re-main lit, there may be engine problems, fuelconsumption may increase and the enginemay lose power.

Catalytic converter

An exhaust gas emission control system (cat-alytic converter) that functions perfectly is vi-tally important for vehicle operation that re-spects the environment.

Please observe the following indications:● Refuel only using unleaded petrol in petrolengine vehicles ››› page 200.

● Do not add too much oil to the engine››› page 207, Checking engine oil level.

● Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

If you are required to drive in a country whereunleaded fuel is not available, when return-ing to a country where using a catalytic con-verter is obligatory, the catalytic convertermust be replaced.

CAUTION

● Never completely empty the tank! An irreg-ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults,which can result in damage to a substantialamount of engine parts and the exhaust sys-tem.

● Refuelling just once with leaded petrol dis-ables the exhaust system!

Particulate filter (diesel engines)

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminatesmost of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter iscleaned automatically without need for indi-cation by the warning lamp . This may benoticed because the engine idle speed in-creases and an odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-ried out (because only short trips are taken,for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-ter and the Diesel particulate filter warninglamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-ess by driving in the following manner: drivefor approximately 15 minutes at a minimumspeed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The

164

Driving

rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil-ter to burn. On completion of the cleaningthe warning lamp will switch off.

If the lamp does not turn off, or the threelamps turn on (particulate filter , fault inthe emission control system and glowplugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired at theearliest opportunity.

WARNING

● Always drive according to the road weatherconditions, the terrain and traffic.

● The particulate filter attains very high tem-peratures. Therefore, do not park the vehiclein places where the exhaust pipe could comeinto contact with dry grass or with highly-flammable materials. Risk of fire!

CAUTION

While the warning lamp is lit up, the fuelconsumption is high, and in certain condi-tions, the engine power is reduced.

Note

● In order for the particulate filter to burn offsoot in a correct manner, avoid carrying outfrequent short journeys.

● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur countcan considerably reduce the useful life of theparticulate filter. The specialised service pro-

vides information about the countries wherefuel with a high sulphur content is used.

Engine management*

This warning lamp monitors the engine man-agement system for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-trol) lights up when the ignition is switchedon while system operation is being verified. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic enginemanagement system while you are driving,this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-cle to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and have the engine checked.

Emission control system*

Control lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage thecatalytic converter. Reduce speed and drivecarefully to the nearest specialised workshopto have the engine checked.

The control lamp lights up:

If a fault has developed during driving whichhas reduced the quality of the exhaust gas(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and

drive carefully to the nearest specialisedworkshop to have the engine checked.

Engine pre-heating/fault system*

The warning lamp lights up to show that theglow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.

The control lamp lights up

If the control lamp lights up when the en-gine is started it means that the glow plugsare preheating. The engine can be startedstraight away when the lamp switches off.

Control lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engine managementsystem while you are driving, the glow plugsystem lamp will flash . Take the vehicle toa specialised workshop as soon as possibleand have the engine checked.

165

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Driving tips

Driving through flooded roads

Fig. 180 Driving through water.

To prevent the vehicle from being damagedwhen driving through water (i.e. floodedroads), please observe the following:● Determine the depth of the water beforeentering. Water can reach a maximum heightof below the door sill ››› Fig. 180.

● Drive at a maximum pace of walking speed.Driving at a higher speed can cause a wavein front of the vehicle, which can cause waterto enter the engine air intake system or otherparts of the vehicle.

● Never stop in the water, never reverse andnever stop the engine.

● Before driving through water deactivate theStart-Stop system ››› page 181.

WARNING

● Driving through water, dirt and mud can re-duce braking capability and prolong the brak-ing distance – Risk of accident!

● Do not carry out any sudden or strong brak-ing manoeuvres after driving through water.

● Clean and dry the brakes as soon as possi-ble after driving through water by breakingintermittently. Carry out braking in order todry the brakes and clean the brake discs onlyif traffic so permits. Do not put other driversat risk.

CAUTION

● In the event of driving through water, partsof the vehicle can be seriously damaged,such as the engine, gearbox, catalytic con-verter, suspension or the electrical system.

● Oncoming vehicles that drive through wa-ter can cause waves that exceed your vehi-cle's permitted level for driving through wa-ter.

● There may be pot-holes mud or rocks underthe water that can hinder or prevent drivingthrough water.

● Do not drive through salt water. The saltcan cause rust. All components that are ex-posed to salt water must be rinsed immedi-ately with fresh water.

Note

After driving through water we recommendthat you contact a specialised service for aninspection.

Preventing damage to the vehicle

In order to prevent damage to the vehicle,take special care:● on roads that are in poor condition,

● when mounting kerbs,

● when approaching very steep ramps, etc.,

● with the parts of the vehicle situated on thelower part of the vehicle, i.e. the spoiler, theexhaust pipe.

This applies especially to vehicles with a verylow suspension (sport) and when the vehicleis fully loaded.

166

Driver assistance systems


Parking aid

General information

Various systems are available to help youwhen parking or manoeuvring in tightspaces, depending on the equipment fittedon your vehicle.

The rear parking aid is an audible assistantthat warns about obstacles located behindthe vehicle ››› page 168.

During parking, Parking System Plus assiststhe driver by visually and audibly warningthem about obstacles detected in front andbehind the vehicle ››› page 168.

WARNING

● Always pay attention, also when lookingstraight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-roundings. The assistance systems are not areplacement for driver awareness. When in-serting or removing the vehicle from a park-ing space, or when performing similar ma-noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-sponsibility.

● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-fic conditions.

● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots inwhich obstacles and people are not regis-

tered. Pay special attention to children andanimals.

● Always keep visual control of the vehiclesurroundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-fected by different factors that may lead todamage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-rounds:

● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:

– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,fences, posts and thin trees.

– Objects that are located above the sen-sors, such as protrusions in a wall.

– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-rectly, these objects or people wearing suchclothes.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affectedby external sound sources. In certain circum-stances this may prevent them from detect-ing people or objects.

● Please note that low obstacles detected bythe system may no longer be registered bythe sensors as the car moves closer, so the

system will not give any further warning. Incertain circumstances, objects such as highkerbs that could damage the bottom of thevehicle are not detected either.

● If the first warning from the Parking Aid isignored, the vehicle could suffer considerabledamage.

● The knocks or damage on the radiatorgrille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-body can adjust the orientation of the sen-sors. This can affect the parking aid function.Have the function checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Note

● In certain situations, the system can give awarning even though there is no obstacle inthe detected area, e.g:

– with rough or cobbled floors or groundwith long grass;

– with external ultrasound sources, such ascleaning vehicles or other vehicles;

– In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-haust gases;

– if the registration plate (front or rear) isnot properly affixed to the bumper sur-face;

– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, freeof snow or ice, and do not cover them withadhesives or other objects. »

167

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, applyit directly only very briefly and always from adistance of more than 10 cm.

● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with theoperation of the Parking Aid.

● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-tem, it is advised that you practice parking inan area or car park that is free from traffic.There must be good weather and light condi-tions.

● The volume and tone of the warnings canbe modified, in addition to the indications››› page 171.

● In vehicles without a driver informationsystem, these parameters can be modified ina SEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.

● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 171.

● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.

Rear parking aid*

The rear Parking Aid assists the driver inparking by means of audible warningsounds.

Description

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 195.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

side area 0.90 m

central area 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in Generalinformation on page 167, ››› in General in-formation on page 167 !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

Activating/Deactivating

When engaging reverse gear, the parking aidis automatically switched on. This is con-firmed with a short warning.

On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aidsystem is disconnected immediately.

Parking system plus*

Fig. 181 Represented area.

Parking system plus assists you audibly andvisually when parking.

There are sensors integrated in the front andrear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,you are alerted by audible warnings and visu-ally on the Easy Connect system.

In the event of danger of a frontal collision,the audible warnings come from the front ofthe vehicle, and in the event of the danger ofa rear-end collision they come from the rear.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 195.

168


The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 m

0.90 m

1.60 m

0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: do not continue tomove forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

Parking Aid Operation

Fig. 182 Centre console: parking aid button.

A

B

C

D

Manual connection of Parking Aid

● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid

● Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display(the audible sounds remain active)

● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.

● OR: press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid

● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.

● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstaclethat is in its forwards path at a speed below10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 169, Automatic ac-tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis-tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-nection is activated in the infotainment sys-tem. A reduced display is shown.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

● Move the selector lever to position P.

● OR: accelerate to more than approx.10 km/h (6 mph) forward.

Temporary suppression of sound in ParkingAid

● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view


● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image(Rear View Camera “RVC”)


● OR: Press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up yellow whenthe system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 183 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation

When the Parking System Plus is switched onautomatically, a miniature of the vehicle will »

169

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

be displayed and the segments will beshown on the left side of the screen››› Fig. 183.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-proaching an obstacle located in front of thevehicle. It only operates every time the speedis reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carriedout in order for it to automatically switch on:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.

● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-fore reducing speed below this numberagain.

● OR: place the selector lever in position Pand then move it from this position.

● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aidminiature indication can be switched on andoff from the Easy Connect system menu››› page 21:


● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parkingand manoeuvring.

● Select the Automatic activation op-tion. When the function button check box isactivated , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automatical-ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv-en when obstacles in front are at a distanceof less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking Aidonly works when you are driving slowly. Ifdriving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 184 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstaclecan be estimated using the segments aroundthe vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

a white segment is dis-played when the obstacle is not withinthe vehicle's trajectory or the directionof travel is in the opposite direction toits location.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Moreover, with the SEAT Media SystemPlus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi-cates the vehicle's expected journey basedon the steering wheel angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-stacles are represented in red, includingthose out of the path. Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in Generalinformation on page 167, ››› in General in-formation on page 167 !

White segments:

Yellow segments:

Red segments:

170


Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Automatic activation

on – activates the Automatic activa-tion option ››› page 169.

off – deactivates the Automatic ac-tivation option ››› page 169.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the frontarea.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reducedto the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when itis switched on, if a continuous warning canbe heard for several seconds (additionally, inthe case of Parking system Plus, the LED ofthe button flashes), there is a fault in thesystem.

Parking System Plus*

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display infront of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor isfaulty, only the obstacles in the areas A andB are displayed ››› Fig. 181. If a front sensor

is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C

and D are displayed.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid rearsensors will not be activated when reversegear is engaged, when the selector lever isturned to position R or when the button ispressed.

Parking System Plus

The distance to possible obstacles at the rearof the vehicle will not be displayed on thescreen and nor will it be indicated by meansof audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-play objects detected at the front, and the ve-hicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-era”*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING

● The Rear Assist does not make it possibleto precisely calculate the distance from ob-stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can itovercome the system's own limits, hence us-ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-ries if used negligently or without due care.The driver should be aware of his/her sur-roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.

● The camera lens expands and distorts thefield of vision and displays the objects on thescreen in a different, vague manner. The per-ception of distances is also distorted by thiseffect. »

171

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Some objects may, due to the resolution ofthe display screen - not be displayed in a sat-isfactory manner or may not be displayed atall. Take special care with thin posts, fences,railings or trees that might not be displayedon screen and could damage the vehicle.

● The rear assist has blind spots where it isnot possible to represent people or objects(small children, animals and certain objectscannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-itor the vehicle's surrounding area at alltimes.

● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice andsnow, and do not cover it.

● The system is not a replacement for driverawareness. Supervise the parking operationat all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-ing area. Adapt your speed and driving styleat all times to suit visibility, weather, roadand traffic conditions.

● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.

● The images on the rear assist screen areonly two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatialdepth, protruding parts or holes in the road,for example, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.

● Vehicle load modifies the representation ofthe orientation lines displayed. The widthrepresented by the lines diminishes with ve-hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-hicle of the luggage compartment is carryinga heavy load.

● In the following situations, the objects orother vehicles shown in the navigation sys-tem display appear to be further away orcloser than they really are: Pay special atten-tion:

– On moving from a horizontal plane to aslope.

– On moving from a slope to a horizontalplane.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at therear.

– When the vehicle approaches objectsthat are not on the ground surface or arejutting out from it. These objects may al-so be outside the camera's angle of vi-sion when reversing.

Note

● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if you are not yet familiarwith the system.

● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-cle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 185 On the rear bumper: location of therear assist camera

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driverduring reverse parking or manoeuvring››› Fig. 185. The camera image is viewed to-gether with orientation lines projected by thesystem on the Infotainment system screen.The bottom of the screen displays part of thebumper corresponding to the number platearea that will be used as reference by thedriver.

Rear assist settings:

Rear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Park the vehicle in a safe place.

● Apply the parking brake.

172



● If necessary, switch on the Infotainmentsystem.


● Press the --- function button displayed onthe right of the image.

● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-noeuvring with the

The system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, for example low visibility or dirtylens.

● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-played very clearly or is incomplete.

● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

● If the position and installation angle of thecamera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assist in a place without

too much traffic or in a car park when thereare good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snowand ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.

● Remove snow using a small brush.

● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.

● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lens. Doing so coulddamage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with therear assist

Fig. 186 Display on the Infotainment systemscreen: orientation lines.

Switching the system on and off

● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-tion is on or the engine running, on engagingreverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-matic gearbox).

● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)or removing the selector lever from the R po-sition (automatic gearbox). The system willalso disconnect immediately after the igni-tion is switched off.

In combination with the Parking System Plus››› page 167, the camera image will cease tobe transmitted immediately when reversegear is engaged or when the selector lever ismoved from the R position, and the optical »

173

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

information provided by the Parking Aid sys-tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rearassist image can also be concealed:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.

● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle thatappears on the left of the screen (whichswitches to the full-screen mode of the Park-ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage reverse, or change the selectorlever's position, engage reverse again ormove the selector lever to position R.

● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Meaning of the orientation lines

››› Fig. 186

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (theapproximate width of the vehicle plus therear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked ingreen ends approximately 2 m behindthe vehicle on the road surface.

1

2

Intermediate line: indicates a distance ofapproximately 1 m behind the vehicle onthe road surface.

Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-tance of approximately 40 cm at the rearof the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace and engage reverse gear (manualgearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-tion (automatic gearbox).

● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side orientation lines lead to-wards the parking space.

● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side orientation lines run parallel toit.

cruise speed (Cruise control)*

Introduction


3

4

The cruise control system allows you to driveat a constant speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) orhigher without having to press the accelera-tor. However, the speed is only maintainedwithin the margin permitted by the enginepower and the braking effect of the engine.

The warning lamp lights up on the generalinstrument panel if cruise control is switchedon.

WARNING

● For safety reasons the cruise control sys-tem must not be used in dense traffic orwhere roads conditions are poor (e.g. due toice, aquaplaning, loose grit, snow). – Risk ofaccident!

● The programmed speed can only be re-es-tablished if it is not too high for current traf-fic conditions.

● Always switch the cruise control system offafter using it in order to avoid involuntaryuse.

CAUTION

● The cruise control cannot maintain a con-stant speed when the vehicle is movingdownhill. The vehicle tends to accelerate un-der its own weight. Therefore, shift down or

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be ac-tivated and available when the reverse gear is en-gaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

174


use the brake pedal in good time to slow thevehicle.

Note

● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, thecruise control system cannot be switched onif the selector lever is in position P, N or R.

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, thecruise control cannot be switched on if firstgear or reverse gear is engaged.

Setting the speed

Fig. 187 Turn signal and main beam head-light lever: cruise control buttons.

Setting speed

– Move knob 1 ››› Fig. 187 to the ON posi-tion.

– Briefly press rocker switch 2 in SET posi-tion when you have reached the speed youwish to set.

On releasing rocker switch 2 from SET, thecurrent speed is stored and will remain con-stant without having to press the acceleratorpedal.

Adjust the stored speed

Increasing speed by pressing the acceleratorpedal

– Press the accelerator to increase the speedof the vehicle.

– Release the accelerator and the previouslyprogrammed speed will be resumed.

If, when pressing the accelerator, the vehicleexceeds the programmed speed by morethan 10 km/h (6 mph) for more than 3 mi-nutes, the set speed will be deleted. Thespeed will have to be stored again.

Increasing speed by pressing switch 2

– Press rocker switch 2 ››› Fig. 187››› page 175 in RES.

– If the button is held down in the RES posi-tion, the speed increases continuously. Re-lease the switch when the required speedis reached. The speed is stored.

Setting a lower speed

– The set speed can be reduced by pressingswitch 2 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 in SET.

– If the button is held down in the SET posi-tion, the speed decreases continuously. Re-lease the switch when the required speedis reached. The speed is stored.

– On releasing the switch at speeds of lessthan 30 km/h (19 mph), no speed will beset and the memory will be deleted. The ve-hicle must be moving at a speed of over30 km/h (19 mph) and switch 2 pressedagain to SET for it to be set.

The speed can be reduced by pressing thebrake pedal, which temporarily switches offthe cruise control.

Temporary deactivation of cruise con-trol

Cruise control is switched off temporarily bypressing switch 1 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 inCANCEL or by pressing the brake or clutchpedal.

The set speed is stored.

To recover the set speed, briefly press switch2 in RES once you have released the brake

or clutch pedal.

175

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Turning off the cruise control system

– Move knob 1 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 toOFF.

Monitoring system Front As-sist*

Introduction

The Front Assist Monitoring system helps toprevent rear collisions.

The Front Assist can warn the driver of colli-sion hazards, prepare the vehicle for emer-gency braking in case of danger, assist thedriver on braking and cause automatic brak-ing.

The Front Assist is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

Distance warning

If the system detects that safety is endan-gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front,it may warn the driver by means of a messageon the instrument panel when driving at aspeed of between approximately 60 km/h(37 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph)››› Fig. 188.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it may warn the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel when driving ata speed of between approximately 30 km/h(18 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph)››› Fig. 188.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warning

If the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervene inthe brakes when driving at a speed of be-tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and210 km/h (130 mph), generating a brief joltto warn of the imminent collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may brake the vehicleautomatically, by progressively increasingbraking effect driving at a speed of betweenapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph) and 210 km/h(130 mph). By reducing speed in case of apossible collision, the system may contributeto reducing the consequences of an accident.

Front assist

If the Front Assist notices that the driver isnot braking sufficiently in case of a collisionhazard, the system can increase braking ef-fect and thus avert the collision when drivingat a speed of between approximately 5 km/h(3 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). Front as-sist only acts while the brake pedal is press-ed down hard.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Front Assistcannot change the laws of physics. The driveris always responsible for braking in time. Ifthe Front Assist issues a warning, then, de-pending on the traffic circumstances, youmust brake immediately or dodge the obsta-cle.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.

● In complex driving situations, the Front As-sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in-tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as intraffic islands.

● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-dar sensor has lost its settings, the systemmay issue unnecessary warnings and inter-vene inopportunely in the braking.

176


● During driving, the Front Assist does not re-act to people or animals or vehicles crossingyour path or which approach you head-on inthe same lane.

● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

Note

● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.

● Automatic interventions by the Front Assiston the brakes may be interrupted by pressingthe clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

● If the Front Assist does not work as descri-bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes severaltimes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have thesystem checked by a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

On-screen warning lamps and mes-sages

Fig. 188 On the instrument panel display:Warning indications.

Distance warning

If the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning willappear on the instrument panel display.

WARNING


Note

When the Front Assist is connected, the indi-cations on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 189 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-er to determine the traffic situation››› Fig. 189 1 . This sensor can detect vehi-cles in front up to a distance of approximately120 m.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case theFront Assist monitoring system does notwork. The instrument panel displays the fol-lowing message: Front Assist: Nosensor vision! If necessary clean the ra-dar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will automati-cally be available again. The message willdisappear from the instrument panel display. »

177

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g. railson the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-sor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If structural modifications are made to the ve-hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As-sist operation may be affected. So structuralmodifications should only be made by speci-alised workshops. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this purpose.

If work is done incorrectly on the front of thevehicle, the radar sensor could be damagedor lose its settings, and Front Assist opera-tion may be affected. So repair work shouldonly be made by specialised workshops.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

● The sensor may become damaged or loseits settings when knocked, for example, dur-

ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.

● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-pose.

● Clean away the snow with a brush and theice preferably with a solvent-free de-icerspray.

Operating the Front Assist monitoringsystem

Fig. 190 On the instrument panel display:Front Assist switched off message.

Fig. 191 On the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever: button for the driver assis-tance systems

The Front Assist monitoring system is activewhenever the ignition is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning function (pre warn-ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 179,Switching the Front Assist Monitoring Sys-tem off in the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist monitoring sys-tem on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front As-sist can be switched on and off as follows:

● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› Fig. 191.

178


● OR: switch the system on or off in the EasyConnect system with the button and thefunction buttons and Driver Assist

››› page 21.

When the Front Assist monitoring system isswitched off, the instrument panel will informthat it has been switched off with the follow-ing indicator ››› Fig. 190.

Switching the advance warning function onor off

The pre-warning function can be switched onor off in the Easy Connect system with thebutton and the function buttons andDriver Assist ››› page 21.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the advancewarning function switched on at all times.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning willappear on the instrument panel display. In this case, increase the safe dis-tance.

The distance warning function can be activa-ted or deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-tem with the button and the function but-tons and Driver Assist ››› page 21.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist MonitoringSystem off in the following situations

In the following situations the Front AssistMonitoring System should be deactivateddue to the system's limitations ››› :

● When the vehicle is to be towed.

● If the vehicle is on a test bed.

● When the radar sensor is damaged.

● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, forexample in a rear collision.

● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

● If the radar sensor is covered temporarilywith some kind of accessory, such as an ad-ditional headlight or the like.

● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,ferry or train.

WARNING

If the Front Assist is not switched off in thesituations described, serious accidents andinjuries may occur.

● Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa-tions.

System limitations

The Front Assist Monitoring System has cer-tain physical limitations inherent in the sys-tem. Thus, in certain circumstances some ofthe system's reactions may be inopportuneor be delayed from the driver's standpoint.So pay attention in order to intervene if nec-essary.

The following conditions may cause the FrontAssist Monitoring System not to react or doso too late:

● On taking tight bends.

● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.

● If the ASR has been manually disconnec-ted.

● If the ESC is controlling.

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.

● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works.

● If the vehicle is reversing.

● If the vehicle over-accelerates.

● In case of snow or heavy rain.

● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes. »

179

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Misaligned vehicles.

● Vehicles crossing the other's path.

● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.

● Special loads and accessories of other ve-hicles that jut out over the sides, backwardsor over the top.

City Emergency braking function

Fig. 192 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning message

The City Emergency braking function is partof the Front Assist monitoring and is activewhenever the system is switched on.

Depending on the equipment, the pre-warn-ing function can be switched on or off in the

Easy Connect system with the button andthe function buttons and Driver Assist

››› page 21.

The City Emergency braking function picksup, at speeds between 5 km/h (3 mph) and30 km/h (19 mph) approximately, the trafficsituation in front of the vehicle up to a dis-tance of about 10 m.

If the system detects a possible collision witha vehicle in front of it, the vehicle preparesfor a possible emergency braking ››› .

If the driver fails to react to a possible colli-sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto-matically, by progressively increasing brakingeffect driving to reduce speed in the event ofa collision. The system can thus help to re-duce the consequences of an accident.

Status display

Automatic deceleration by means of the CityEmergency braking function is displayed onthe instrument panel by means of the ad-vance warning ››› Fig. 1921).

WARNING

The smart technology included in the CityEmergency braking function cannot defy the

laws of physics. The driver is always respon-sible for braking in time.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

● The City Emergency braking function alonecannot prevent accidents or serious injury.

● In complex driving situations, the CityEmergency braking function may issue unnec-essary warnings and intervene inopportunelyin braking, such as in work areas or if thereare metal rails.

● If the operation of the City Emergency brak-ing function is impaired, for example, by dirtor because the radar sensor has lost its set-tings, the system may issue unnecessarywarnings and intervene inopportunely in thebraking.

● During driving, the City Emergency brakingfunction does not react to people or animalsor vehicles crossing your path or which ap-proach you head-on in the same lane.

Note

● When the City Emergency braking functioncauses a braking, the brake pedal is “hard-er”.

● Automatic interventions on the brakes bythe City Emergency braking function may be

1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colourdisplay is in colour.

180


interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera-tor or moving the wheel.

● The City Emergency braking function canbrake the vehicle until it stops completely.However, the brake system does not halt thevehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!

● If several inopportune intervenes occur,switch off the Front Assist and with it the CityEmergency braking function. Take it to a spe-cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership.

● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc-cur, the City Emergency braking function mayswitch off automatically.

Start-Stop System*

Operating

Fig. 193 Instrument panel: Start-Stop systembutton

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-duce harmful and CO2 emissions.

The system is automatically switched on ev-ery time the ignition is switched on.

The system automatically switches off the en-gine when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. wait-ing at traffic lights.

The current status of the Start-Stop system isdisplayed on the general instrument paneldisplay.

Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase)

– Stop the vehicle (if necessary using thehandbrake).

– Shift to neutral.

– Release the clutch pedal.

Automatic engine start up (Start phase)

– Press the clutch.

Switching the Start-Stop system on and off

The Start-Stop system can be switched onand off by pressing the ››› Fig. 193 but-ton.

The warning lamp in the button will light upwhen the system is switched off.

If the vehicle is in Stop phase when the but-ton is pressed, the engine will start immedi-ately.

The Start-Stop system works under complexdriving conditions that are difficult to detectwithout specialist technology. The set of nec-essary conditions for the correct operating ofthe Start-Stop system are indicated below.

Conditions for automatic engine shut down(Stop phase)

● Selector lever in neutral.

● Clutch pedal not pressed.

● Driver with seat belt fastened.

● Driver door closed.

● The bonnet closed.

● Vehicle stationary.

● The factory-fitted towing bracket is not elec-trically connected to a trailer.

● Engine at operating temperature.

● Vehicle's battery sufficiently charged.

● Vehicle not on a very steep slope

● Engine speed below 1,200 rpm.

● Vehicle battery temperature is neither toohigh nor too low.

● Sufficient brake system pressure.

● Difference between outside temperatureand set interior temperature not too great

● Vehicle speed since the last time the en-gine started was above 3 km/h (2 mph).

● Particulate filter not being cleaned››› page 164. »

181

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Front wheels not overly turned (steeringwheel turned less than three quarters of aturn)

Conditions for engine start up (Start phase)

● Clutch pedal pressed.

● Max./min. temperature set.

● Windscreen defrost function switched on.

● High blower speed.

● Start-Stop button pressed.

Conditions for automatic engine start upwithout driver involvement

● Vehicle moving at a speed of over 3 km/h(2 mph).

● Difference between outside temperatureand interior temperature is too great

● Vehicle's battery insufficiently charged.

● Insufficient brake system pressure.

If the driver seat belt is unfastened for morethan 30 seconds in Stop phase, the enginemust be started using the ignition key.Please observe the messages on the generalinstrument panel display.

Warnings on the instrument panel display(valid for vehicles not fitted with an informa-tive display)

FAULT: Start-Stop Fault in the Start-Stop sys-tem

START-STOP IMPOSSI-BLE

Engine cannot be auto-matically shut down

START-STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shutdown (Stop phase)

SWITCH OFF IGNITION Switch the ignition off

START MANUALLY Start the engine manually

WARNING

● If the engine is switched off, neither thebrake servo nor the power steering will work.

● Do not move the vehicle when the engine isswitched off.

CAUTION

Switch off the Start-Stop system ››› page 166before driving through a pool of water on theroad.

Note

● The battery temperature may reflectchanges in outside temperature after severalhours. If the vehicle has been stopped out-side at temperatures below zero or in directsunlight, for example, the battery tempera-ture may take several hours to reach the val-ues required for the correct operating of theStart-Stop system.

● If the Climatronic system is operating auto-matically, this could impair automatic engineshut down under certain conditions.

Tiredness detection (break rec-ommendation)*

Introduction

The Fatigue detection informs the driverwhen their driving behaviour shows signs offatigue.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatiguedetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-cient in length when making long journeys.

● The driver always assumes the responsibil-ity of driving to their full capacity.

● Never drive if you are tired.

● The system does not detect the tiredness ofthe driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-formation in the section ››› page 183, Systemlimitations.

● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-vre as driver tiredness.

● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!

● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

182


Note

● Fatigue detection has been developed fordriving on motorways and well paved roadsonly.

● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Function and operation

Fig. 194 On the instrument panel display: fa-tigue detection symbol.

Fatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This isconstantly compared with the current drivingbehaviour. If the system detects that the driv-er is tired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 194. Themessage on the instrument panel display is

shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or thebutton on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 23.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 23.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system with thebutton and the function button ››› page 99. A mark indicates that the adjust-ment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

● When cornering

● On roads in poor condition

● In unfavourable weather conditions

● When a sporty driving style is employed

● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe-riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) thesystem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

183

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer

Technical requirements

If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or is equipped with a selection ofSEAT Original Accessories, it meets all the rel-evant technical and legal requirements.

In vehicles with a towing bracket it is possi-ble to remove the ball joint, situated (togeth-er with the special assembly instructions) inthe housing for the spare wheel in the vehi-cle luggage compartment ››› page 75, Vehicletool kit*.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer youare going to use has a 7-pin connector, thecorresponding adaptor, acquired from theSEAT Original Accessories Catalogue, can beused.

If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to thecar, it must be done according to the instruc-tions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

Note

Any queries that may arise can be directed toan authorised SEAT dealer.

Trailer weight

Trailer weight

The combined vehicle and trailer must bebalanced. To do so use the maximum permit-ted towing bracket load. An insufficientweight exerted by the trailer drawbar on theball joint of the towing bracket will have anegative impact upon the response of the ve-hicle-trailer assembly on the road.

Weight distribution

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible.Ensure that the objects do not move.

If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailerloaded then the load distribution is incorrect.However, if these conditions cannot be avoi-ded, drive very slowly.

Tyre pressure values

Correct the tyre pressure in your vehicle to“total load” ››› page 216, Useful life of tyres.

Trailer weight

Never exceed the authorised trailer weightunder any circumstances ››› page 221, Tech-nical specifications.

The trailer weights listed are only applicablefor altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level.Due to lower air density, engine power de-creases depending on the increase in alti-

tude, this also reduces climbing ability,which requires a reduction of the weight ofthe vehicle with a trailer by 10% for every1000 m increase in altitude. The weight ofthe assembly is calculated by adding the ve-hicle weight (loaded) to the trailer weight(loaded). Always drive with special care whentowing a trailer.

The towed load and support load informationthat is displayed on the towing bracket man-ufacturers label are only values for the verifi-cation of the device. The correct figures foryour specific vehicle, which are usually lowerthan these figures, are given in the documen-tation of your vehicle.

WARNING

● Exceeding the maximum established loadper axle and the maximum towing bracketload in addition to the maximum permittedload or the load of the vehicle + trailer as-sembly can cause accidents and serious inju-ries.

● A sliding load can considerably affect thestability and safety of the vehicle + trailer as-sembly, resulting in accidents and serious in-juries.

184



Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of theroad behind the trailer with the standard rearvision mirrors. If this is not the case, youshould have additional exterior mirrors fitted.Observe the relevant statutory requirementsof the country you are in.

Headlights

Before starting a journey, also check theheadlight beam settings with the trailerhitched up. Adjust the headlight range set-tings if necessary ››› page 117, Main lightrange control .

Driving speed

For your own safety do not drive faster thanthe maximum permitted speed indicated onthe trailer.

At all times, immediately reduce speed if youdetect the slightest swaying movement of thetrailer. Never try to “return the trailer to astraight position” by accelerating.

Brakes

Brake in due course! If the trailer has an over-run brake, apply the brakes gently at first andthen, firmly. This will prevent the jerking thatcan be caused by locking of trailer wheels.Change to a lower gear in good time before

descending a slope in order to take advant-age of the engine brake.

The trailer is incorporated into the vehicle'santi-theft alarm system:

● When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti-theft alarm and a towing bracket.

● When the trailer is electrically connected tothe vehicle via the towing bracket socket.

● When the vehicle electrical device and thetowing bracket are operational.

● When the vehicle is locked and the vehi-cle's anti-theft alarm device is activated.

Once the electrical connection is interruptedwith the vehicle trailer locked, the alarmsounds.

Always switch off the vehicle anti-theft alarmdevice before connecting or disconnecting atrailer. The vehicle anti-theft alarm devicecould cause the alarm to sound ››› page 112,Anti-theft alarm system*.

Engine overheating

In the event that the coolant temperaturegauge needle moves to the right section ofthe scale or to the red area, immediately re-duce speed. If the control lamp flashes onthe general instrument panel, stop the vehi-cle and switch off the engine. Wait severalminutes and check the coolant level in thetank ››› page 208.

Please observe the following indications››› page 208, Control lamp.

The coolant temperature can be reduced byswitching on the heating.

WARNING

● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-fic conditions.

● An electrical installation that is connectedincorrectly or by non-specialised personnelcan prevent the connection of the current tothe trailer and cause faults in the operation ofthe electrical system throughout the entirevehicle, leading to accidents and serious in-jury.

● All electrical work must be carried out onlyby specialised services.

● Never directly connect the trailer electricaldevice to the electrical sockets of the reversedriving lights or other sources of electricalcurrent.

CAUTION

● Avoid corners, and sudden and sharp brak-ing.

● Once the trailing arm has been removed,place the corresponding cover on the hole ofthe fastening point. This prevents dirt fromentering the hole – see the trailer system as-sembly manual. »

185

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● In the event of frequent journeys with atrailer, we recommend also having the vehi-cle inspected in between the service inter-vals.

● When connecting and disconnecting thetrailer, the handbrake must be applied.

● For technical reasons, trailers with LED re-verse lights cannot be incorporated into thevehicle anti-theft alarm system.

Towing bracket device for trail-er

Introduction

If the vehicle is equipped with a towingbracket device from the factory or is a genu-ine SEAT accessory, it meets all national tech-nical and legal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. If the towingbracket is equipped with a 7-pin connector,you can use the corresponding availableadaptor that is a genuine SEAT accessory.

The towing device has a maximum verticalload of 50 kg.

WARNING

● Before driving with the ball-headed bar fit-ted, verify its correct assembly and place-ment in the clamping bush.

● Do not use the ball-headed bar if it is notcorrectly placed and fixed in the clampingbush.

● Do not use the towing device for towing if itis damaged or has missing parts.

● Do not modify or adapt the towing deviceconnection.

● Never disengage the ball-headed bar withthe trailer still hitched.

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage the paint on thebumper when handling the ball-headed bar.

Description

Fig. 195 Towing bracket device support forhitching/ball-headed bar.

The ball-headed bar is detachable. It is loca-ted in the spare wheel compartment or in thespare wheel compartment in the boot››› page 75, Vehicle tool kit*.

Key to ››› Fig. 195

13-pin socket

Safety flange

1

2

186


Clamping bush

Clamping bush cap

Ball head cover

Ball-headed bar

Locking balls

Centred

Red marking on the manual regulator

Manual regulator

Key

Key slot cover

Red marking on the manual regulator

White marking on the ball-headed bar

Note

Contact an Authorised Service Partner if youlose your key.

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Placing in service position

Fig. 196 Placing in service position.

Fig. 197 Service position.

Before assembling, place the ball-headed barin service position.

– Turn key A fully in the direction of arrow1 ››› Fig. 196.

– Hold the ball-headed bar with your lefthand.

– Pull manual regulator B outward in the di-rection of arrow 2 and turn it fully in thedirection of arrow 3 . »

187

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

The manual regulator will remain in this posi-tion.

Service position ››› Fig. 197

● Key C is in an open position – the key ar-row points to the “unlocked” symbol. The keycannot be removed from the key slot.

● The D locking balls may be fully insertedinto the body of the ball-headed bar by ap-plying some pressure.

● The red E marking on the manual regula-tor points towards the white marking on theball-headed bar.

● Between the manual regulator and thebody of the ball-headed bar there is a clearlyvisible space of approximately 4 mm F .

Once the ball-headed bar has been posi-tioned like this, it will be ready to be placedin the clamping bush.

WARNING

Do not use the ball-headed bar if it cannot becorrectly placed in the service position.

CAUTION

The key cannot be removed from the manualregulator key slot when it is in the service po-sition.

Assembly of the ball-headed bar

Fig. 198 Placing the ball-headed bar/lockingand removing the key.

Fig. 199 Placing the key slot cover.

– Remove the cap from the clamping bush 4

››› Fig. 195 by pulling downwards.

– Place the ball-headed bar in the service po-sition ››› page 187.

– Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath››› Fig. 198 and push it into the clampingbush as far as possible until you hear itclick into place ››› .

The manual regulator A automatically turnsin the opposite direction, adjusting to theball-headed bar ››› .

– Switch off the manual regulator lock withkey B by turning the key fully to the rightin the direction of arrow 1 – the arrow inthe key displays the “locked” symbol.

– Remove the key in the direction of arrow2 .

– Place cover C over the manual regulatorlock in the direction of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 199.

188


– Verify the correct placement of the ball-headed bar ››› page 189.

WARNING

● Do not hold the manual regulator with yourhand when fitting the ball-headed bar sinceyou could sustain injuries to your fingers.

● When mounting the ball-headed bar, al-ways lock it with a key and remove the keyfrom the slot.

● The ball-headed bar must not be in theservice position with the key in the key slot.

● If the ball-headed bar is not placed in theservice position you will not be able to placeit in the clamping bush.

CAUTION

When removing the key, always place thecover over the key slot of the manual regula-tor to prevent dirt from entering.

Note

Once removed, place the clamping bush capin an appropriate location in the boot.

Verification of correct placement

Fig. 200 Correct placement of the ball-head-ed bar.

Before using the ball-headed bar, ensure it iscorrectly fitted.

Ensure that:

● The ball-headed bar does not come out ofthe clamping bush in a “jerky” manner.

● The red mark A ››› Fig. 200 on the manualregulator signals toward the white mark onthe ball-headed bar.

● The manual regulator is adjusted to theball-headed bar, leaving no space betweenthem.

● The regulator is locked and the key hasbeen removed.

● Cover B has been placed over the manualregulator lock.

WARNING

Only use the towing bracket device when theball-headed bar is properly fitted!

189

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Disassembly of the ball-headed bar

Fig. 201 Remove the key slot cover/unlockwith the key.

Fig. 202 Unblock the ball-headed bar.

– Remove cover A from over the regulatorkey slot in the direction of arrow 1

››› Fig. 201.

– Insert key B in the key slot.

– Open the manual regulator lock by turningkey B fully to the left in the direction of ar-row 2 . The arrow on the key points to the“unlocked” symbol.

– Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath››› Fig. 202 and remove manual regulator

C with your other hand in the direction ofarrow 3 .

– Turn the removed regulator fully in the di-rection of arrow 4 and hold it firmly in thisposition.

– Remove the ball-headed bar from theclamping bush, pulling downward in the di-rection of arrow 5 .

The ball-headed bar should be placed in theservice position so that it is ready to be inser-ted into the clamping bush ››› .

– Place the cover over the clamping bush 4

››› Fig. 195.

WARNING

● Never leave the ball-headed bar unsecuredin the boot. It could be damaged in the eventof sudden braking, putting the safety of pas-sengers at risk!

● Never disassemble the ball-headed barwith the trailer still hitched.

CAUTION

● If you do not turn the manual regulatorfully, it will return to its original positionwhen the ball-headed bar is removed. Themanual regulator will be stuck to the ball-headed bar and you will not be able to put itin the service position. Therefore, before youassemble it again, you must place the ball-headed bar in this position.

● When disassembling, place the cap on theclamping bush holder’s key slot. This wayyou will prevent dirt from entering the clamp-ing bush.

Note

● Before disassembling the ball-headed bar,we recommend placing the cover on the ballhead.

190


● Clean the ball-headed bar thoroughly be-fore returning it to the on-board toolbox.

Use and maintenance

Cover the clamping bush with the cap to pre-vent dirt from entering.

Before hooking on the trailer, check the ballhead and, if necessary, lubricate it with ade-quate lubricant.

Place the protective cover over the ball headwhen storing the bar. This way, you will avoidgetting the boot dirty.

If it gets dirty, clean and dry the clampingbush thoroughly with an appropriate prod-uct.

CAUTION

The top part of the clamping bush opening islubricated. Be careful not to remove this lu-brication.

191

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Advice

Care and maintenance

Accessories and modificationsto the vehicle

Accessories, replacement parts andrepair work

If you wish to retrofit accessories in the vehi-cle, or if a part of the vehicle has been re-placed by a new part or technical modifica-tions are required, the following instructionsmust be taken into account:

● Before purchasing accessories or spareparts and before making technical modifica-tions, always request advice from an Author-ised SEAT dealer ››› .

● In the event that technical modificationsare carried out on the vehicle, the instruc-tions and regulations specified by the com-pany, SEAT, must be observed.

No damage will be caused to the vehicle ifthe established procedures are respected,which guarantees safe driving and operation.After the modifications are carried out, thevehicle will comply with the restrictions andregulations of the highway code. More infor-mation can be obtained at an Authorised

SEAT dealer, where all jobs required can becarried out appropriately.

Vehicle improvements and modifications

The owner must keep the technical documen-tation regarding the modifications carried outon the vehicle so it can be handed over tothose responsible for processing end-of-lifevehicles. This ensures end-of-life processingof the vehicle, while protecting the environ-ment.

Work done on the electrical components andsoftware can cause disruption in operations.Due to the interconnection of electronic com-ponents, their malfunction can also impairsystems that are not directly affected. Thiscan adversely affect reliability of the vehicle,and can produce excessive wear of the parts.

Damage caused by technical modificationsthat are not made with the consent of SEATwill be excluded from the warranty – see war-ranty certificate.

WARNING

● Jobs or modifications unduly carried out onyour vehicle can cause disruption to opera-tions - Risk of accident!

● We recommend that you use only expresslyauthorised SEAT Accessories and SEAT Origi-nal Spare Parts for your vehicle. The reliabili-ty, safety and compatibility with your vehicle

of SEAT original spare parts and accessorieshas been verified.

● Despite the continuous observation of themarket, we cannot judge nor guarantee thesuitability of other products for your vehicle,be they authorised products or products ap-proved by a state testing facility.

Note

SEAT original spare parts and accessories canbe purchased at authorised SEAT dealerswhere the purchased parts can also be fitted.

Modifications and effects of the air-bag system

In the adjustment and modification, respectthe SEAT directive.

Modifications and corrections of the frontbumper, doors, front seats, roof or bodyworkmust be carried out at authorised SEAT work-shops. Components of the airbag system canbe found in these parts of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Airbag modules must never be repaired.They must be replaced.

● Never fit components of the airbag systemremoved from old vehicles or those originat-ing from a recycling process in the vehicle.

192


● The modification of the suspension of thevehicle wheels, including the use of non-per-mitted combinations of tyres and rims can al-ter the operation of the airbag system and in-crease the risk of serious or fatal injuries inan accident.

● During all jobs on the airbag system, in ad-dition to the removal and fitting of parts ofthe system in the course of other repair jobs,parts of the airbag system can be damaged.Therefore in the event of an accident, thismay cause the airbags to activate incorrectlyor not activate at all.

Radio and aerial reception

In vehicles factory-fitted with an audio ornavigation system, the aerial may be instal-led in different places:● inside the rear window next to the heatingelements,

● on the roof of the vehicle.

Care and cleaning

Introduction

Regular and suitable care helps to maintainthe useful life of your vehicle. This may alsobe one of the requirements for upholding any

warranty claims in the event of corrosion orpaint defects.

We recommend you use cleaning productsfrom the SEAT Original Accessories pro-gramme available in SEAT dealers. Please fol-low the instructions for use on the packag-ing.

WARNING

● Cleaning products and other materials usedfor car care can damage the health if mis-used.

● Always keep car care materials in a safeplace out of the reach of children. Risk of poi-soning!

● When washing the car during the winterseason: Moisture and ice on the brakes mayaffect braking efficiency. Risk of accident!

● The ignition must always be switched offwhen the car is washed. Risk of accident!

● Do not clean the underside of the car or in-side the wheel arches without protecting yourhands and arms. You may cut yourself onsharp metal parts!

● Perfumes and air fresheners inside the ve-hicle may be harmful to health at high tem-peratures in the interior.

CAUTION

● Check the colour-fastness of your clothingto avoid damaging or visibly staining the fab-ric (leather), upholstery and fabric trim.

● Cleaning products containing solvents maydamage the material being cleaned.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damage to paintwork.

● If washing the vehicle with a hose in win-ter, do not direct the jet of water directly atthe locks or at the door seals or bonnet. Riskof freezing.

● Do not use sponges for removing insects orabrasive household sponges, etc. on paintedsurfaces. Risk of damage to the painted sur-face!

● Do not put stickers on the inner side of therear window in areas where heating elementsor the aerial are located. This could causedamage and, in the case of the aerial, radioand navigation system reception faults.

● Do not clean the inside of the window withsharp objects or corrosive or acidic cleaningproducts. Risk of damaging the heating ele-ments or the aerial.

● Do not attach any fragrance or air freshenerto the dash panel. Risk of damage to thedash panel!

● To avoid damaging the parking aid systemsensors, spray them only briefly at a mini-mum distance of 10 cm when cleaning the ve-hicle with a high-pressure or steam cleaner.

● Do not clean the roof panel with a brush.Risk of damage to the panel surface! »

193

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice


● The packaging of the product used to carefor your vehicle is hazardous waste. It mustbe disposed of according to current local law.

● Only wash the car in special wash bays.

Note

● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth-er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similarstains on the fabric (leather), upholstery andfabric trim as soon as possible.

● We recommend that you visit an authorisedSEAT dealer to clean and care for the interiorof your vehicle, due to the problems that mayarise when cleaning and caring for the interi-or of your vehicle and to the utensils andknowledge required.

Washing the vehicle

The best protection of the vehicle from theharmful influences of the environment in-volves frequent washing and waxing. The fre-quency with which the vehicle is washed de-pends on many different factors, such as:

● Frequency of use

● Type of parking (garage, underneath trees,etc.)

● Time of year

● Weather conditions

● Environmental conditions

The longer substances such as insects, birddroppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt andother aggressive materials remain on thepaintwork, the more damage they do. Hightemperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)further intensify the corrosive effect.

After the winter season, it is important tohave the underside of the vehicle washedthoroughly.

car washes

Your vehicle can be washed in an automaticcar wash.

Before going through an automatic car wash,be sure to take the usual precautions such asclosing the windows, etc.

If the vehicle has special accessories such asspoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,etc., it is advisable to consult the car washoperator beforehand.

The windscreen wiper rubbers must be de-greased after going after the car wash andwaxing.

Washing by hand

When washing the car by hand, use plenty ofwater to soften the dirt first and rinse off aswell as possible.

Then clean the vehicle with a sponge, gloveor brush. Start on the roof and work down.Use only slight pressure when cleaning thepainted surfaces of the vehicle. A car sham-poo should only be used for very persistentdirt.

Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-ten.

Wheels, sills and underside should becleaned last. Use a second sponge for this.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughlyand then dry with a chamois.

Washing with high-pressure cleaners

When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This particular-ly applies to the operating pressure and thedistance of the spray from the surface of thevehicle. Do not hold the spray nozzle tooclose to the parking aid system sensors andsoft materials, such as rubber hoses or insu-lating material.

194


WARNING

Do no use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a “rotatingjet”!

CAUTION

Do not use water hotter than +60°C (140°F).Risk of damage to the vehicle!

Sensors and camera lenses

● Use a small brush to remove snow and ade-icer spray to remove ice.

● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-uct and a soft, dry cloth.

● Moisten the camera lens using a standardalcohol-based glass cleaning agent andclean the lens with a dry cloth.

CAUTION

● When you clean the vehicle with a pressurewasher:

– Stay a suitable distance from the sensorson the front and rear bumpers.

– Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-rounding area with the pressure washer.

● Never use warm or hot water to removesnow and ice from the reverse camera lens,as it could crack the lens.

● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on thelens.

Vehicle paint waxing and polishing

Care

To a great extent, good waxing protects thevehicle surface from the harmful effects ofthe environment.

The vehicle must be treated with a high qual-ity, hard wax when water no longer formsdroplets on clean paintwork.

A new coat of high quality, hard wax can beapplied to the clean, painted surface onlywhen it has fully dried. Even if a wax solutionis used regularly in the car wash, it is advisa-ble to protect the paint with a coat of wax atleast twice a year.

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paint haslost its shine, and the gloss cannot bebrought back by applying wax.

The vehicle must be waxed after polishing ifthe polish used does not contain wax com-pounds to seal the paint.

CAUTION

● Never wax the windows.

● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-ted parts with a matt finish or on plasticparts.

● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy ordusty environment.

Cleaning of chromed parts

Clean the chrome first with a clean cloth andthen buff up with a soft, dry cloth. If this doesnot clean the chrome properly, use a specialchrome cleaner.

CAUTION

Do not polish the chrome in a dusty environ-ment or it could be scratched.

Damage to the paint

Minor damage to the paint, such as scratchesor stone chips, should be touched up withoutdelay using paint.

Suitable touch-up brushes or sprays for thecolour of your vehicle can be purchased fromauthorised SEAT dealers.

Note

We recommend you leave paint damage re-pairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.

195

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Plastic parts

Exterior plastic parts will come clean using adamp cloth. If this is not sufficient, plasticparts can also be treated with special sol-vent-free plastic cleaning detergents.

Do not use paint cleaners, polishes or wax onplastic parts.

Windows and mirrors

Remove snow and ice from windows and rearvision mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid damaging the surface of the glass, thescraper should only be pushed in one direc-tion and not moved to and fro.

The windows should also be cleaned on theinside at regular intervals.

Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry thewindows and rear vision mirrors.

Do not use the chamois used to polish thebodywork to dry the windows. Waxing andpolishing residues could cause smears onthe glass and hinder visibility.

CAUTION

● Never use hot or boiling water to removesnow and ice from the windows. Risk of crack-ing glass!

● Make sure you do not damage the paint-work on the vehicle on removing snow andice from the windows and rear vision mirrors.

● Do not remove the snow or ice dirty withthick particles, e.g. gravel, sand or road salt,from windows and mirrors. Risk of damage tothe glass and mirror surfaces.

Headlights

Use soap and clean, hot water to clean thefront headlights.

CAUTION

● Never rub the headlights to dry them anddo not use sharp objects to clean the plasticglass material. These could damage the pro-tective paint and cause the headlights tocrack.

● Do not use aggressive cleaning products orchemical solvents to clean the glass. Thiscould damage the headlights.

Caring for rubber seals

The weatherstrips on doors and windows willremain pliable and last longer if they are oc-casionally treated with a suitable rubber careproduct. This will prevent premature ageingand leaks. If they are properly cared for, the

seals will be less likely to freeze up in thewinter.

Door lock cylinder

Special products must be used to defrostlock cylinders.

Note

● Make sure, when washing the vehicle, thatthe least amount of water possible enters thelock cylinders.

● We recommend the use of products fromthe selection of SEAT Original Accessories tocare for the door lock cylinder.

Wheels

Wheel trims

If you wash the vehicle regularly, you shouldalso thoroughly wash the wheel trim. Regu-larly remove any brake dust and road saltfrom the wheels, otherwise the wheel materi-al could be damaged. Repair any damage tothe wheel paintwork immediately.

Alloy wheels

After thorough washing, treat the wheelswith a protective product for alloy wheels. Donot use abrasive products to care for thewheels.

196


WARNING

Moisture, ice and road salt may affect brakingefficiency. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

Heavy dirt on the wheels could lead to theirmisalignment. This could result in vibrationsbeing transmitted to the steering wheel thatunder certain conditions may cause prema-ture steering wear. This dirt must be re-moved.

Note

We recommend you leave paint damage re-pairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.

Vehicle underbody protection

The underside of the vehicle is coated to per-manently protect it from chemical and me-chanical agents.

Given that damage to the protective coatingduring driving cannot be completely ruledout, we recommend you check the conditionof the protective coating on the underbodyand suspension at regular intervals, prefera-bly before the start and end of the coldestseason of the year.

Authorised SEAT dealers have suitable spe-cial products and the necessary facilities and

are aware of the techniques required for theirapplication. We therefore recommend alltouch-up work or additional anti-corrosionmeasures be performed by an authorisedSEAT dealer.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosioncoatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-verter, particulate filter or heat shields on theexhaust system. Once the engine hasreached operating temperature, these sub-stances could catch fire. Risk of fire!

Cavity waxing

All cavities on the vehicle exposed to corro-sion are permanently factory-protected by awax solution.

This wax solution does not need to bechecked or touched up. Should wax run outof the cavities at high ambient temperatures,remove it using a plastic scraper and cleanaway any stains using lighter fluid.

WARNING

Note the regulations concerning safety andenvironmental protection if you use lighterfluid to remove the wax. Risk of fire!

Leatherette and upholstery

Leatherette can be cleaned with a dampcloth. If this is not sufficient, these partsshould only be cleaned with solvent-freeplastic care and cleaning products.

Textile covers and trim parts on doors, bootlid, etc. can be cleaned with special deter-gents, e.g. dry foam. A soft sponge or brushor a micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning canbe used. Use special products to clean theheadliner.

The dye used in many garments, for exampledark jeans, is not always sufficiently colour-fast. Seat upholstery (fabric and leather), es-pecially when light-coloured, may visibly dis-colour if the dye comes out of clothing, evenin normal conditions. This is not an uphols-tery defect but indicates that the dye in theitem of clothing is not solid enough.

Heated seat upholstery

Do not clean the seat upholstery with dampproducts, as this could damage the seatheating system.

Clean the upholstery with special products,e.g. dry foam, etc.

197

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Natural leather

Leather should be looked after from time totime, depending on its use.

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with waterand wipe over the leather surfaces.

More stubborn dirt

Do not let water soak through the leather orpenetrate the seams.

Dry it with a soft, dry cloth.

Removing stains

Remove fresh water-based stains such as cof-fee, tea, juices, blood, etc. with an absorbentcloth or kitchen roll. Use the special deter-gent to clean dried-on stains.

Remove fresh fat-based stains such as but-ter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an ab-sorbent cloth or paper towel or use the spe-cial detergent if the stain has not yet soakedthrough the surface.

Use a grease-dissolving product to treatdried-in, fat-based stains.

Treat less common stains such as ball-penand other inks, felt-tip pens, nail polish,emulsion paint, shoe cream etc. with a spe-cial leather stain remover.

Leather care

The leather should be treated regularly(about twice a year) with a leather-care prod-uct.

Apply the protective product very sparingly.

Dry the leather with a soft, dry cloth.

CAUTION

● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlightfor long periods so that it does not lose itscolour. If the car is left for a prolonged periodoutdoors, cover the leather so that it doesnot lose its colour.

● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such aszips, rivets or belts can leave permanentscratches and rough marks on the surface ofthe leather.

● Use of a mechanical steering wheel lockcan damage the leather surface of the steer-ing wheel.

Note

● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul-tra-violet protection at regular intervals andafter cleaning. The cream will nourish andmoisturise the leather, keep it supple andable to breathe. In addition, it will also helpto protect the surface of the leather.

● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months andremove fresh dirt as necessary.

● Preserve the colour of the leather. A specialcoloured cream for leather will renew the col-our of more heavily worn areas as required.

● Leather is a natural material with specificproperties. During vehicle use, the appear-ance of parts of the leather covers maychange; folds or wrinkles may appear as a re-sult of their use.

Seat belts

Keep the seat belts clean!

Wash soiled seat belts with mild, soapy wa-ter, removing any heavier dirt with a softbrush.

Check the condition of all seat belts at regu-lar intervals.

Very soiled belts may not retract properly.

WARNING

● The seat belts should never be removedfrom the vehicle for cleaning.

● Never clean using chemical products, aschemical detergents destroy the fabric. En-sure that the seat belts do not come into con-tact with corrosive fluids such as acids, etc.

● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,the belt in question must be replaced by anOfficial Service.

198

Checking and refilling levels

● Make sure that the inertia reel seat beltsare completely dry before allowing them toretract.


Fuel

Refuelling

Fig. 203 Vehicle as seen from the rear right:fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank un-screwed cap attached.


The correct type of fuel for your vehicle is in-dicated on a sticker on the inside of the fueltank flap, along with the tyre size and pres-sure ››› Fig. 203 .

Vehicles with a fuel cap with key

– Press the flap in the direction of the arrow1 ››› Fig. 203.

– Open the cover in the direction indicatedby the arrow 2 .

– Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one handand unlock it using the ignition key, turningit anti-clockwise.

– Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise andplace it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 203.

– Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feedtube as far as it will go.

The fuel tank is full as soon as the automaticfiller nozzle cuts out ››› .

– Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feedtube and place it back on the pump.

– Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicksinto place.

– Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one handand lock it using the ignition key, turning itclockwise.

– Press the tank flap with your hand to closeit. »

199

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

– Check that the fuel flap is correctly closed.

Vehicles with a keyless fuel cap (the sideflap will unlock using the central locking sys-tem)

– Once the vehicle has been unlocked usingthe central locking button, press the fuelflap in the direction of the arrow 1

››› Fig. 203.

– Open the cover in the direction indicatedby the arrow 2 .

– Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise andplace it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 203.

– Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feedtube as far as it will go.

The fuel tank is full as soon as the automaticfiller nozzle cuts out ››› .

– Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feedtube and place it back on the pump.

– Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicksinto place.

– Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear itclick into place.

– Check that the fuel flap is properly closed.

WARNING

Observe all relevant statutory regulations ontransporting spare fuel canisters. For safety

reasons, we do not recommend carrying aspare canister in the vehicle. The canistercould be damaged in an accident and fuelmay leak. Risk of fire!

CAUTION

● Switch off the auxiliary heater (heater andindependent heater) before filling the tank.

● The fuel tank is full as soon as the automat-ic filler nozzle cuts out. Do not continue fill-ing, as this will fill the expansion chamber.

● Never completely empty the tank! An irreg-ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults,which can result in damage to a substantialamount of engine parts and the exhaust sys-tem.

● If any fuel is spilt onto the paintwork of thevehicle, it should be removed immediately.Risk of damage to paintwork!

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised per-sonnel.

Note

The fuel tank capacity is around 55 litres, ofwhich 7 litres are the reserve.

Types of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-rol. The petrol must comply with EuropeanStandard EN 228 or German standard DIN51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-ated by their octane rating (RON).

The following titles appear on the corre-sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octanepetrol, with a slight decrease in power.

Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95octanes

You should use super petrol with a minimumof 95 octanes.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

200


Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super plus 98 octanepetrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav-iour, power and service life of the engine.This is why the petrol you use should carrysuitable additives already included by thepetrol industry, free of metals. These addi-tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep thefuel system clean and prevent deposits frombuilding up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-tives is not available or engine problemsarise, the necessary additives must be addedwhen refuelling ››› .

Not all petrol additives have been shown tobe effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-ditives may cause significant damage to theengine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-ditives should never be used. Metal additivesmay also be contained in petrol additives forimproving anti-detonation ratings or octaneratings ››› .

SEAT recommends “genuine VolkswagenGroup Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-ers, where information on how to use themcan also be obtained.

CAUTION

● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that thefuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Using them may damage theengine!

● Never refuel with fuels containing a largeproportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).This could damage the fuel system.

● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel orfuel containing other metal additives wouldseriously impair the efficiency of the catalyticconverter.

● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-knock additives may contain metal additivesthat could seriously damage the engine orthe catalytic converter. These additives mustnot be used.

● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol with anoctane rating lower than the correct grade forthe engine.

Note

● You may use petrol with a high octane num-ber than the one recommended for your en-gine.

● In those countries where unleaded petrol isnot available, you may refuel with a fuel witha low lead content.

Diesel fuel

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend the use of diesel fuel whichcomplies to European standard EN 590. Ifdiesel fuel which meets European standardEN 590 is not available, the Cetane number(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engineis equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-phur content of the fuel must be below 50parts per million.

Winter-grade diesel

Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and itis more difficult to start the engine. For thisreason, petrol stations in some countries al-so offer winter diesel with improved fluiditywhen cold (winter-grade diesel). »

201

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa-rator, the instrument panel may display the

following warning: Water in thefuel filter. If this is the case, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop so thatthey can drain the fuel filter.

CAUTION

● The vehicle is not designed for the use ofFAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system wouldbe damaged if you used biodiesel.

● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called“thinners”, petrol or similar additives withdiesel fuel.

● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may benecessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-quently than is specified in the MaintenanceProgramme. We recommend having this doneby a specialised workshop. If water is allowedto collect in the filter, this can cause engineperformance problems.

Engine compartment

Introduction


Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment,e.g. when checking and refilling fluids.Therefore, always observe the warnings andfollow all general safety precautions. The en-gine compartment is a dangerous area.

WARNING

● Never open the bonnet if you see steam,smoke or coolant escaping from the enginecompartment. Risk of scalding! Wait until nosteam or coolant can be seen before openingthe bonnet.

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

● Engage neutral in vehicles with manualgearbox and move the selector lever to posi-tion P in vehicles with automatic gearbox.

● Apply the handbrake firmly.

● Wait for the engine to cool down.

● For safety reasons, the bonnet must alwaysbe closed when the vehicle is moving. There-

fore, after closing the bonnet always checkthat it is properly secured.

● Should you notice that the bonnet is notsafely secured when the vehicle is moving,stop the vehicle immediately and close thebonnet properly. Risk of accident!

● Keep children away from the engine com-partment.

● Do not touch hot engine parts. Risk ofburns!

● Never spill fluids on hot engine compart-ments. These fluids can cause a fire (e.g. anti-freeze in coolant)!

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system, especially when workingon the battery.

● Never touch the radiator fan when the en-gine is hot. The fan may start running sud-denly!

● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!

● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-pansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure!

● Protect face, hands and arms from any hotsteam or hot coolant released by covering thecap with a large, thick rag when opening theexpansion tank.

● Do not leave any objects, such as cloths ortools, in the engine compartment.

1) Valid for the market: Algeria.202


● When working underneath the vehicle, se-cure it so that it cannot roll away and supportit safely on suitable supports. The hydraulicjack is not sufficient for this purpose. Risk ofinjuries!

● If any tests have to be performed with theengine running, there is an extra safety riskfrom rotating parts, such as the drive belt, al-ternator and radiator fan, etc., and from thehigh-voltage ignition system. You should alsonote the following:

– Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.

– Keep away from moving engine partswhen wearing jewellery, loose clothing orlong hair. Risk of fatal injuries! All jewel-lery must be removed, hair tied back andclose-fitting clothing worn.

● Observe the following additional warningsif work on the fuel system or the electricalsystem is necessary.

– Always disconnect the battery from theon-board network.

– Do not smoke.

– Never work near naked flames.

– Always keep an approved fire extinguish-er immediately available.

CAUTION

● When topping up fluids, make sure the cor-rect fluid is put into the correct filler opening.

Otherwise this can cause serious malfunc-tions or engine damage!

● Never open the bonnet using the releasecatch. Risk of damage!


Due to the environmentally-friendly disposalof fluids, the equipment necessary and theknowledge required, let an authorised SEATdealer change fluids during service inspec-tions of the vehicle.

Note

● Please contact an authorised SEAT dealerwith any doubts regarding fluids.

● Fluids of the correct specifications can beacquired from the selection of SEAT OriginalAccessories.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 204 Unlocking the bonnet. »

203

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Fig. 205 Locking the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

– Open the front left door.

– Pull the lever 1 ››› Fig. 204 under the dashpanel in the direction indicated by the ar-row.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are not liftedaway from the glass. Otherwise the paint-work may be damaged.

– Pull the release catch in the direction of thearrow 2 ››› Fig. 204 and the bonnet will bereleased.

– Hold and lift the bonnet.

– Remove the support strut 3 ››› Fig. 205from its fastening in the direction of the ar-row and secure the raised bonnet so thatthe end of the strut hooks onto the openingin the bonnet 4 .

Closing the bonnet

– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook thesupport strut keeping the bonnet open andinsert it into its fastening 3 .

– Let the bonnet drop from a height ofaround 20 cm into the catch Do not pressdown afterwards!

– Check that the bonnet is correctly closed.

204


Checking levels

Fig. 206 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Window washer water tank . . . . . . . . 210

Engine oil filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Engine oil level dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

The checking and replenishment of the serv-ice fluids are carried out on the componentsmentioned above. These operations are de-scribed in the ››› page 202.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Overview

You will find further explanations, instruc-tions and restrictions on the technical speci-fications as of ››› page 221.

Note

The layout of the engine compartment is verysimilar to all petrol and diesel engines.

Radiator fan

The radiator is driven by an electric motorand controlled according to the temperatureof the coolant.

After the engine has been stopped and theignition switched off, the radiator fan maycontinue running for around 10 minutes.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out inthe following page should appear on the con-tainer of the service oil; when the containerdisplays the specific standards for petrol anddiesel engines together, it means that the oilcan be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicatedin the Maintenance Programme, be »

205

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

performed by a technical service or special-ised workshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engineare listed in the ››› page 40.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLifeservice) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-tance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of theMaintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,this means that your vehicle has the LongLifeservice programmed. If it lists the codes QI1,QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service isdependent on time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife serviceintervals*)

Special oils and processes have been devel-oped which, depending on the characteris-tics and individual driving profiles, enablethe extension of the oil change service (Long-Life service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending theservice intervals, it must only be used ob-serving the following indications:

● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-tervals.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 207 andLongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to

top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-vals ››› page 40 (up to a maximum of 0.5litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the “LongLifeservice interval” or it has been disabled (byrequest), you may use oils for fixed serviceintervals, which also appear in››› page 40. In this case, your vehiclemust be serviced after a fixed interval of 1year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatevercomes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-gramme.

● In exceptional circumstances, if the engineoil level is too low ››› page 207 and you can-not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,you can add a small quantity of oil conform-ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whetheryour vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulatefilter.

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 207 andyou cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 orACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding anengine oil that conforms to the correspond-ing VW specifications and recommend keep-ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-gine oil will always be available for a top-up ifneeded.

Control lamp

The control lamp flashes red (oil pressurelow)


Oil pressure. Switch off the en-gine! Instruction Manual!

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andcheck the engine oil level ››› page 207

If the symbol flashes although the oil level iscorrect, do not drive on. Do not even runthe engine at idle speed!


206


The control lamp lights up yellow (insuf-ficient oil level)


Check the oil level!Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andcheck the engine oil level ››› page 207

If the bonnet remains open for more than 30seconds, the warning lamp switches off. Ifthe engine oil is not refilled, the warninglamp illuminates again after 100 km (62miles).

The control lamp flashes yellow (oil levelsensor faulty)


Oil sensor. Workshop!If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, Thewarning lamp flashes various times afterthe ignition is switched on and an audiblewarning is given.


Checking engine oil level

Fig. 207 Engine oil dipsticks.


The dipstick shows the engine oil level.››› Fig. 207.

Checking oil level

– Park the vehicle on a level surface and en-sure the engine is at operating tempera-ture.


– Open the bonnet.

– Wait a few minutes for the engine oil toflow back to the sump and remove the dip-stick.

– Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and in-sert it again as far as it will go.

– Then pull the dipstick out again and checkthe oil level.

It is normal for the engine to consume a cer-tain amount of oil. Depending on how youdrive and the conditions in which the vehicleis used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 li-tres per 1,000 km. Oil consumption can alsobe higher for the first 5,000 km (3000 miles).

You should therefore check the oil level atregular intervals, ideally every time you fillthe tank or before setting off on a long trip.

CAUTION

● The oil level must never exceed area A

››› Fig. 207. Risk of damage to the exhaustsystem!

● If the engine oil cannot be topped up underthe given conditions, do not drive on! Stopthe engine and seek the professional assis-tance of an Official Service, as this couldcause serious damage to the engine.

Topping up engine oil

– Check the engine oil level ››› page 207,Checking engine oil level.

– Unscrew the cap from the filler opening.

– Put in the specified grade of oil 0.5 litres ata time ››› page 205.

– Check the oil level ››› page 207. »207

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

– Replace the oil filler cap carefully and pushthe dipstick all the way in.

Changing engine oil

Engine oil must be changed with the frequen-cy indicated in the Maintenance Programmeor according to the service interval indicator››› page 30.

CAUTION

Do not mix engine oil with additives. Risk ofdamage to the engine! Damage caused bythese products is not covered by the warran-ty.

Note

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.

Coolant

Control lamp

If the warning lamp (blue) is lit up, the en-gine has not yet reached its operating tem-perature1). Avoid high engine speeds, hard

acceleration and subjecting the engine tohigh loads.

If the warning lamp (red) is lit up or flash-ing, the coolant temperature is too high or itslevel is too low.


Check coolant! Instruction Man-ual!

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, checkthe coolant level ››› page 208 and refill ifnecessary ››› page 209.

If the coolant is situated in the prescribedarea, the high temperature may be due to afault in the cooling system fan. Check the ra-diator fan fuse and replace it if necessary››› page 43.

If the warning lamp (red) remains lit up,despite both the coolant level and the radia-tor fan fuse being in correct condition, stop the vehicle!


WARNING

● Take care when opening the coolant reser-voir. When the engine is warm or hot, thesystem is pressurised – Danger of burns!

Wait for the engine to cool before openingthe cover.

● Do not touch the fan. The fan can switch onautomatically regardless of whether the igni-tion is switched on.

Checking coolant level

Fig. 208 Engine compartment: coolant fluidtank.


The coolant expansion tank is located in theengine compartment of the vehicle.


– Open the bonnet ››› page 202.

1) This does not apply to vehicles equipped with aninformative display.

208


– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank ››› Fig. 208. When the engineis cold, the coolant should be betweenmarks B (min.) and A (max.). When theengine is hot, it may be slightly above markA (max.).

If the coolant fluid level in the reservoir is toolow, this will be indicated by the red warn-ing lamp illuminating on the general dashpanel ››› page 208, Control lamp. However,we recommend checking the coolant level di-rectly in the tank.

Coolant fluid loss

Any loss of coolant normally indicates a leak.It is not sufficient merely to top up the cool-ant. The cooling system should be inspectedby an Official Service without delay.

CAUTION

● In the event of a fault that causes the en-gine to overheat, contact an authorised SEATdealer immediately, as this could damage theengine.

● Anti-freeze that does not correspond to thecorrect specification may particularly affectcorrosion protection considerably.

● Faults caused by corrosion may lead tocoolant leaks. Risk of serious engine faults!

Topping up the coolant level


– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the cap on the coolant expansiontank ››› Fig. 208 with a cloth and carefullyunscrew the cap.

– Refill the level of coolant.

– Screw the cap on again until it clicks intoplace.

Do not use a different type of additive if theprescribed anti-freeze additive is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency. In thiscase, use only water and bring the coolantconcentration back up to the correct level assoon as possible at an Official Service.

Always top up with unused coolant.

Never fill the coolant tank above mark A

(max.) ››› Fig. 208 Excess coolant is forcedout of the cooling system through the over-pressure valve in the filler cap of the expan-sion tank when the engine heats up.

WARNING

● The anti-freeze additive and, therefore, theentire coolant, are a health hazard. Avoidtouching the coolant. Coolant fumes are alsoa health hazard. For this reason, always storethe coolant additive in a safe place out of thereach of children. Risk of poisoning!

● If splashed into eyes, rinse immediatelywith clean water and seek immediate medicalattention.

● Seek immediate medical attention if thecoolant is accidentally ingested.

CAUTION

If the coolant cannot be topped up under thegiven conditions, do not drive on. We rec-ommend contacting an authorised SEAT deal-er, as this can damage the engine.

Brake fluid

Checking brake fluid level

Fig. 209 Engine compartment: brake fluidreservoir.

Read the additional information carefully››› page 41 »

209

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment of the vehicle.


– Open the bonnet ››› page 202.

– Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir››› Fig. 209. It should be between the “MIN”and “MAX” marks.

The fluid level drops slightly after a period oftime due to automatic compensation forbrake pad wear. This is quite normal.

However, if the level goes down noticeably ina short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,there may be a leak in the brake system. Ifthe brake fluid level in the reservoir is toolow, this will be indicated by the warninglamp illuminating on the instrument panel ››› page 153, Control lamp.

WARNING

● If the fluid level has dropped below the MINmark, do not continue driving. Risk of acci-dent! Go to a technical service.

● Heavy use of the brakes may cause a va-pour lock if the brake fluid is left in the brakesystem for too long. This would seriously af-fect the efficiency of the brakes and the safe-ty of the vehicle.

Changing the brake fluid

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, itgradually absorbs moisture from the atmos-phere. If the water content in the brake fluidis too high, the brake system could corrode.The water content also reduces the boilingpoint of the brake fluid.

The brake fluid must comply with one of thefollowing standards or specifications:● VW 50114

● FMVSS 116 DOT4

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.

Windscreen washer

Topping up windscreen washer fluid

Fig. 210 Engine compartment: windscreenwasher reservoir.


The container for the windscreen washer con-tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen orrear window and the headlight washer sys-tem. The container is located in the enginecompartment.

The capacity of the reservoir is approximately3.5 litres; in vehicles with a headlight washersystem, it is approximately 5.4 litres1).

Plain water on its own is not enough to cleanthe glass and the headlights properly. We

1) Valid only for certain countries. 5.4 litres for bothversions.

210


therefore recommend using clean water witha glass cleaning product to eliminate anystubborn dirt (with an anti-freeze additive inwinter).

Although your vehicle has heated windscreenwasher jets, anti-freeze should always beadded to the water in winter.

Ethanol can be used where glass cleaner withanti-freeze is unavailable. The concentrationof ethanol must be no greater than 15 %.However, remember that anti-freeze in thisproportion only protects down to -5°C(+23°F).

CAUTION

● Never mix the windscreen washing waterwith anti-freeze used for the cooling systemor other additives.

● If the vehicle is equipped with a headlightwasher system, only mix in with the water adetergent that does not damage polycarbon-ates.

Note

When topping up the fluid, do not move thefilter from the container opening, as thiscould contaminate the fluid hoses and lead toa windscreen washer malfunction.

Battery

Introduction


Warning symbols on the battery

Symbol Meaning

Always wear safety glasses!

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Alwayswear gloves and hearing protection!

Keep open flames, sparks, uncoveredlights and lit cigarettes away when workingon the battery!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge!

Keep children away from the battery!

Incorrect handling of the vehicle batterycould lead to damage. We therefore recom-mend all work on the vehicle battery be per-formed by an authorised SEAT dealer.

Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working on the battery and the electri-cal system. Therefore, always observe thewarnings and follow all general safety pre-cautions.

WARNING

● Battery acid is very corrosive, therefore, thebattery must be handled with the utmostcare. Wear protective gloves and protect youreyes and skin when handling batteries. Thecorrosive fumes in the air irritate and inflamethe respiratory tract and cause conjunctivitis.It corrodes tooth enamel. Causes deep anddifficult-to-heal wounds when it comes incontact with the skin. Repeated contact withdiluted acids causes skin disease (inflamma-tion, ulcers and fissures). When in contactwith water, acids dilute and develop a greatdeal of heat.

● Do not tilt the battery, as acid could leakout of the vapour vents. Protect your eyeswith glasses or a protective helmet! Risk ofblindness! If acid should splash into theeyes, rinse the affected eye immediately forseveral minutes using clean water. Then seekmedical care immediately.

● Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin orclothing with soap solution as quickly as pos-sible and rinse off with plenty of water. If acidis swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor im-mediately.

● Keep children away from the battery.

● Hydrogen is released and a highly explo-sive mixture of gases is generated when thebattery is under charge. Sparks when discon-necting or releasing cable terminals with theignition switched on could also cause an ex-plosion. »

211

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● A short circuit is produced if the battery ter-minals are bridged, e.g. using metal objects,cables, etc. Possible consequences of a shortcircuit: melting of lead plates, battery explo-sion and fire, splashing acid.

● The following is forbidden while working onthe battery: fire and open flames, smokingand activities that could produce sparks.Avoid causing sparks when handling cablesor electrical apparatus. Risk of injury in theevent of large sparks.

● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical components and disconnectthe cable from the negative terminal (-) of thebattery. To change a bulb, simply switch offthe corresponding light.

● Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat-tery. Risk of explosion and acid burns! Re-place a frozen battery.

● Never use the jump leads on batteries inwhich the electrolyte level is too low. Risk ofexplosion and acid burns!

● Never use a damaged battery. Risk of ex-plosion! Replace a damaged battery immedi-ately.

CAUTION

● Never disconnect the battery when the igni-tion is switched on, as the electrical system(electronic components) of the vehicle couldbe damaged. When disconnecting the batteryfrom the vehicle electrical system, disconnect

its negative terminal (-) first. Only then maythe positive terminal (+) be disconnected.

● When connecting the battery, first connectthe positive terminal (+) and then the nega-tive terminal (-). The battery cables must nev-er be connected to the wrong battery termi-nals. Risk of burning the electrical installa-tion!

● Make sure the battery acid does not comeinto contact with the bodywork. Risk of paint-work damage.

● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlightto protect it from ultraviolet radiation.

● If the vehicle is not used for 3 or 4 weeks,the battery could run flat. This is becausesome components use electricity even instandby mode (e.g. control units). Prevent thebattery from running flat by disconnecting itsnegative terminal or leave it charging at a lowcurrent.

● If you frequently use the vehicle for shorttrips, the battery may not fully charge andcould run flat.


A flat battery is particularly harmful waste forthe environment. It must therefore be dis-posed of according to current local law.

Note

Replace a battery once it is older than 5years.

Control lamp

If the control lamp is illuminated while theengine is running, the battery is not charg-ing.

Go to a technical service. Have the car's elec-trical equipment inspected.

CAUTION

Additionally, if the warning lamp lights upwhile driving, the warning lamp also lightsup (cooling system fault). Stop the vehicleand switch off the engine – Risk of enginedamage!

Lifting the battery cover

Fig. 211 Battery: Opening the cover.

The battery is located beneath a plastic coverin the engine compartment.

212


– Open the battery cover in the direction indi-cated by the arrow ››› Fig. 211.

– The positive terminal (+) of the battery isconnected in reverse order.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

Fig. 212 Battery: Electrolyte level indicator.

We recommend you have the acid level regu-larly checked at an official technical service,particularly in the following cases.● At high outside temperatures.

● On long daily trips.

● Whenever the vehicle is loaded››› page 213, Charging the battery.

In vehicles equipped with a battery with col-our indicator, the so-called magic eye››› Fig. 212 changes colour to indicate theacid level.

Air bubbles can influence the colour of the in-dicator. Therefore, carefully knock the indica-tor before checking the acid level.● Black – the acid level is correct.

● Colourless or light yellow – acid level toolow, battery must be changed.

Note

● The battery acid level is also regularlychecked during servicing at authorised SEATdealers.

● The electrolyte level on “AGM” batteriescannot be checked for technical reasons.

● Vehicles equipped with the “Start-Stop”system include a battery control unit to con-trol the battery level for repeated enginestarting.

Winter service

At low temperatures the battery provides onlya fraction of the starting power it has at nor-mal temperatures.

A flat battery can also freeze at temperaturesslightly below to 0°C (32°F).

We therefore recommend you have the bat-tery checked and, if necessary, charged at anofficial SEAT technical service before the startof winter.

Charging the battery

A fully-charged battery is essential for relia-ble starting.

– Switch off the ignition and all electricalequipment.

– For “fast-charging” only: disconnect bothbattery connection cables (first the “nega-tive” terminal and then the “positive”).

– Connect the charger cables to the batteryterminals (red = “positive”, black = “nega-tive”).

– Plug in the battery charger and switch on.

– After charging the battery: Switch off thebattery charger and disconnect the cable.

– Remove the charger cables.

– If necessary, reconnect both battery cablesto the battery (first the “positive” cable,then the “negative” cable).

When charging with a low current (e.g. with asmall battery charger), the battery does notnormally have to be disconnected. The in-structions of the battery charger manufactur-er must be followed.

Use a current equivalent to or lower than10% of the battery capacity to fully chargethe battery.

Before “fast-charging” the battery however,both battery cables must be disconnected. »

213

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

“Fast-charging” a battery is dangerous andrequires a battery charger and special knowl-edge. Fast charges should be performed byan official technical service.

The battery caps should not be opened whilethe battery is being charged.

CAUTION

In vehicles fitted with the “Start-Stop” sys-tem, the charger cable cannot be directly con-nected to the negative terminal of the vehiclebattery but must be attached to the engineground point ››› page 52.

Disconnecting and connecting thebattery

The following functions will either be inoper-ative or will not work properly after discon-necting and reconnecting the battery:

Function Installation

Setting the clock ››› page 95

The multifunction display datais deleted

››› page 97

Note

We recommend having the vehicle checked byan authorised SEAT dealer to guarantee thecorrect working order of all electrical sys-tems.

Replacing the battery

A replacement battery must have the samecapacity, voltage, current rating and size asthe original. The appropriate types of batterycan be acquired from authorised SEAT deal-ers.

We recommend having the battery changedby an authorised SEAT dealer, where the newbattery will be correctly installed and theoriginal disposed of in line with regulations.

Automatic disconnection of electricalequipment

When heavily-charging a battery, the pro-gramme selected by the electrical systemcontrol unit prevents the battery from auto-matically discharging. This may result in thefollowing:

● Increase in idling speed so that the alterna-tor can supply more current to the electricalsystem.

● The performance of certain electrical com-ponents could be limited or some may switchoff temporarily, e.g. the heated seats, theheated rear window, the 12 V power socket.

Note

Despite any measures taken by the controlunit, the battery could drain. e.g. with the en-

gine is switched off, the key is turned in theignition for a long period or the side lights orparking lights are switched on. The switchingoff of certain electrical components does notimpair driving comfort and often the driverwill not even notice.

214

Wheels and tyres

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

Introduction

WARNING

● During the first 500 km, new tyres do notgive maximum grip, therefore you shoulddrive carefully. Risk of accident!

● Never drive with damaged tyres. Risk of ac-cident!

● Only use wheels and tyres that been au-thorised by SEAT or your vehicle model. Fail-ure to do so could impair road safety. Risk ofaccident!

● Never exceed the maximum speed permit-ted for your tyres. Risk of accident due to tyredamage and loss of vehicle control!

● Under-inflated tyres are submitted to great-er rolling resistance. This means that theycan overheat at high speeds. This can causetread separation and even tyre blow-out.

● For driving safety, tyres should be replacedat least in pairs according to the axle and notindividually. The tyres with the deepest treadshould always be used on the front wheels.

● Never fit used tyres of an unknown age orprior use.

● Tyres must be immediately changed at thevery latest when they have worn down to thetread wear indicators.

● Worn tyres reduce the necessary grip athigh speeds on damp surfaces. This couldlead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled vehiclemovement – “skidding” on damp surfaces).

● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

● Do not use summer or winter tyres that aremore than 6 or 4 years old respectively.

● Wheel bolts should be clean and screweasily. However, they must never be treatedwith grease or oil.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is moving. Risk of accident! If the tighten-ing torque of the wheel bolts is too high, thebolts and threads could be damaged, leadingto the permanent deforming of the rim sup-port surfaces.

● Incorrectly handled wheel bolts could leadto a wheel coming loose while the vehicle ismoving. Risk of accident!

● Observe the national legal requirements re-garding the use of snow tyres and chains.

CAUTION

● Where a spare wheel that is not compatiblewith the wheels fitted is used, follow the in-structions ››› page 218.

● The prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

● Protect your tyres from coming into contactwith oil, grease and fuel.

● Replace any lost valve caps immediately.


Under-inflated tyres increases fuel consump-tion.

Note

● We recommend having all work on tyresand wheels carried out by an authorised SEATdealer.

● We recommend using wheels, tyres, hubcaps and snow chains from the SEAT OriginalAccessories programme.

215

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Useful life of tyres

Fig. 213 Side view of tyres with tread wear in-dicators.

Fig. 214 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Tread wear indicator

The base of the side of the original tyres onyour vehicle show 1.6 mm high tread wear in-dicators ››› Fig. 213. The position of these in-dicators is given on the tyre sidewalls by theletters “TWI”, triangular symbols or othersymbols.

The useful life of the tyres depends primarilyon the following factors:

Tyre pressure values

Under-inflation or over-inflation will consider-ably reduce the useful life of the tyres andimpair the vehicle's handling. Therefore,check the tyre pressure, including the sparewheel, at least once a month and before anylong journey.

Inflation pressures for summer tyres are lis-ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap››› Fig. 214. The pressures for winter tyres are0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) above the summervalues.

Always check the pressure when the tyre iscold. Do not reduce over-pressure in warmtyres. The tyre pressures must be altered tosuit notable changes in the load being car-ried.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When

driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-sumption may increase slightly.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking all increase tyre wear.

Wheel balancing

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.Various factors encountered when drivingcan cause them to become unbalanced,which results in vibration of the steeringwheel.

The wheel must be rebalanced if a new tyre isfitted or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment cau-ses excessive tyre wear, frequently on oneside, and also impairs vehicle safety. If tyrewear is very irregular, contact an OfficialService.

Tyre damage

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, onlydrive over kerbs or similar obstacles slowlyand at a right angle if possible.

Check tyres and wheels regularly for damage(punctures, cracks, blisters, deformities,etc.). Remove any foreign objects embeddedin outside of the treads.

216

Wheels and tyres

Unusual vibration or the car pulling to oneside may indicate that one of the tyres isdamaged. Reduce speed immediately andstop if you suspect that a wheel may havebeen damaged! Check the tyres for damage(blisters, cracks, etc.). If no external damageis visible, drive slowly and carefully to thenearest Official Service and have the vehicleinspected.

Changing wheels

Fig. 215 Interchanging tyres.

Changing wheels around

If the wear is visibly greater on the front tyres,they should be exchanged for the rear tyresas shown in the diagram ››› Fig. 215. All thetyres will then last for about the same time.

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresand maintain their optimum useful life, theyshould be changed around every 10 000 km.

Storing tyres

When you remove the tyres, mark them in or-der to maintain the same direction of rotationwhen they are installed again.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyresshould be stored in a cool, dry and preferablydark location. Store tyres in a vertical posi-tion, if they are not fitted on wheel rims.

New tyres or wheels

All four wheels must be fitted only with tyresof the same type, size and the same treadpattern.

The correct tyre/wheel combinations speci-fied for your vehicle are listed in its docu-mentation.

Understanding the tyre designations makesit easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyredesignation is marked on the sidewall. Forexample.

195/55 R 15 85 HThis contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

55 Height/width ratio in %

R identifying tyre construction letter –Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

85 Load rating code

H Speed rating code letter

The tyres are subject to the following maxi-mum speed limits:

Speed rating codeletter

Maximum speed limit

Q 160 km/h (99 mph)

R 170 km/h (106 mph)

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

U 200 km/h (124 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

The manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (possibly only on the innerside of the wheel).

DOT … 27 12… »

217

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

means, for example, that the tyre was pro-duced in the 27th week of 2012.

Follow the instructions ››› page 218 if youonly have a temporary spare wheel.

Note

A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted tofind out whether wheels or tyres of differentsizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can befitted, and to find out about the combinationsallowed between the front axle (axle 1) andthe rear axle (axle 2).

Tyres with directional tread pattern

The direction of rotation is indicated by thearrows on the tyre sidewall. The direction ofrotation indicated must be respected. Thisguarantees optimum grip and helps avoid ex-cessive noise, wear and aquaplaning.

In the event of a flat tyre, a spare wheel withan undetermined tread pattern or an oppo-site tread pattern must be used and you mustdrive carefully, as in these cases the tyres nolonger offer maximum performance.

Spare wheel

Spare wheel location*

Fig. 216 Luggage compartment: spare wheel.

The spare wheel is housed in a well underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is secured by a special bolt ››› Fig. 216.

Take out the tool box before removing thespare wheel.

The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must bechecked (preferably whenever the tyre pres-sure is checked – see sticker on fuel tank flap››› page 216) to ensure the spare wheel re-mains ready for use.

If the spare wheel is not the same size or de-sign as the tyres that are mounted on the car(for example if the car has winter tyres ortyres with direction tread), only use the sparetyre for a short period of time in the event of

breakdown and drive with the correspondingcare ››› .

It must be replaced as soon as possible for awheel with a normal size and finish.

Temporary spare wheel

If the vehicle is equipped with a temporaryspare wheel, there will be a warning sign onthe rim of the wheel.

Follow the instructions below when drivingwith this wheel fitted.● After fitting the wheel, the warning signmust not be covered.

● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)with the spare wheel and take great carewhile driving. Avoid heavy acceleration, hardbraking and fast cornering.

● The tyre pressure is the same as that of thestandard tyres.

● Only use this spare wheel to reach thenearest Official Service, as it is not designedfor permanent use.

WARNING

● Under no circumstances must damagedspare wheels be used.

● If the spare wheel is different in size or de-sign to the tyres currently fitted, never drivefaster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavyacceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

218

Wheels and tyres

CAUTION

Follow the instructions given on the tempora-ry spare wheel label.

Note

The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must al-ways correspond to the highest pressure pre-scribed for the model of vehicle in question.

Tyre monitoring systems

Tyre pressure*

The tyre pressure monitoring system usesABS sensors to compare the revolutions andthe circumference of each wheel. Should thecircumference of any wheel change, thewarning lamp on the general instrumentpanel will light up and an audible warningwill be heard.

Tyre circumference may change if:● Tyre pressure is too low

● Tyre structure is damaged

● Vehicle load not evenly distributed

● wheels on one axle are subjected to greaterload, (e.g. driving with trailer, uphill, down-hill);

● Snow chains are fitted

● The temporary spare wheel is fitted

● One wheel on the axle has been changed

Basic system settings

Should the tyre pressure change or if one ormore wheels are changed or the position ofthe wheel on the vehicle is changed, e.g.changing round the front and rear wheels, orwhere a warning lamp lights up when driv-ing, the system must be adjusted as follows:

● Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressures››› page 216.


● Store the new tyre pressure in the EasyConnect system with the button and thefunction button Setup ››› page 21.

The warning lamp lights up

If the pressure on at least one tyre is signifi-cantly lower than the pressure set by the driv-er, the warning lamp will light up ››› .

The warning lamp flashes

If the warning lamp flashes, there is a fault inthe system. Contact a specialised service tohave it fixed.

WARNING

● If the warning lamp lights up, slow downimmediately and avoid any severe braking orsteering manoeuvres. Stop and check thetyres and their pressure as soon as possible.

● Under certain conditions (e.g. sporty driv-ing style, driving on loose surfaces or in win-ter) the warning lamp may take a while tolight up or may remain switched off.

● Despite the tyre pressure monitoring sys-tem, the driver remains responsible for main-taining the correct tyre pressure. You musttherefore check the tyre pressure often.

Note

● The tyre pressure monitoring system is nota replacement for regularly checking the tyrepressure, as it is unable to recognise an evendrop in pressure.

● The tyre pressure monitoring system is un-able to warn of a sudden drop in tyre pres-sure, e.g. a puncture. In this case, try to stopthe vehicle carefully with no severe brakingor steering manoeuvres.

● To ensure the tyre pressure monitoring sys-tem works correctly, the basic setting mustbe performed every 10 000 km (6000 miles)or once a year.

● If the battery is disconnected the warninglamp lights up when the ignition is switch-ed on. This warning lamp must switch off af-ter covering a short distance.

219

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Winter service

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will significantly improve han-dling of the vehicle in winter road conditions.The design of summer tyres (width, rubbercompound, tread pattern) gives less grip attemperatures below +7°C (45°F), on ice andsnow. This applies particularly to vehiclesequipped with wide section tyres or highspeed tyres (code letters H or V on the side-wall).

In order to preserve the performance of thevehicle as much as possible, winter tyresmust be fitted on all four wheels, the mini-mum depth of the tread must be 4 mm andthe maximum age must be 4 years.

You can use winter tyres of a lower speed rat-ing if the maximum speed limit of these tyreswill not be exceeded, even if the maximumspeed limit for the vehicle is higher.


Summer tyres should be fitted again in time,as they give better handling on roads free ofsnow and ice and at temperatures over +7°C(45°F). Summer tyres have a shorter brakingdistance, produce less rolling noise and donot wear as quickly. They also reduce fuelconsumption.

220

Technical specifications

Technical data


Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-ded in the Maintenance Programme or thevehicle registration documents shows whichengine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi-cations section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PSPferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZCetane number, indication of the dieselcombustion power.

RONResearch octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data on the datalabel

Fig. 217 Data sticker.

Vehicle data sticker

The vehicle data sticker ››› Fig. 217 is locatedon the boot floor and is also attached to theMaintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on thevehicle data sticker:

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle model

Identifying letters of the gearbox/numberof the original paint finish/Interior equip-ment number/engine power/engineidentifying letter »

1

2

3

221

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Partial description of the vehicle

Diameter of authorised tyre in inches1)

Type plate

The model plate is located at the bottom ofthe B pillar, between the front and rear doors,on the right-hand side.

The type plate indicates the followingweights:

● Total permitted weight of the vehicle whenloaded

● Maximum authorised weight of the vehiclewith a trailer, when the vehicle operates as atractor

● Maximum permitted load of the front axle

● Maximum permitted load of the rear axle

Weight in running order

The weight in running order only has one ap-proximate value. This value corresponds tothe minimum operative weight of the vehiclewithout additional equipment that increasesits weight, i.e. air conditioning, spare wheel,towing bracket.

The running order weight also includes 75 kgof the weight of the driver and service fluids,in addition to a fuel tank at 90% capacity.

4

5

From the difference between the total permit-ted weight in running order the approximatecarrying capacity can be calculated ››› .

The carrying capacity must include:● occupants,

● all pieces of equipment and other weights,

● roof loads including the roof rack,

● equipment that is not included in the run-ning order weight,

● when using the towing bracket, the draw-bar load (max. 50 kg)

Calculating fuel consumption and CO2 emis-sions according to the ECE regulations andthe EU specifications

Calculation of fuel consumption for urbandriving begins when cold-starting the engine.Then, normal city driving is simulated.

In calculating extra-urban driving fuel con-sumption, braking and acceleration is donein all gears, as in daily use of the vehicle.Driving speed varies within a range of 0 and120 km/h (75 mph).

The consumption value in combined drivingis composed of 37% of the value of urbandriving and 63% of the value of extra-urbandriving.

WARNING

The maximum permitted weight values mustnot be exceeded – Risk of an accident anddamage to the vehicle!

Note

● If you wish to calculate the exact weight ofyour vehicle please contact a SEAT dealer.

● Depending on the volume of equipment,driving style, road conditions, weather condi-tions and the condition of the vehicle, con-sumption values can differ from the theoreti-cal values stated here.

Information on fuel consump-tion

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

1) Valid only for certain countries.222


The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions dependon the equipment/features of each individualvehicle, as well as on the driving style, roadconditions, traffic conditions, environmentalconditions, load or number of passengers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values can dif-fer from those calculated in the current Euro-pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittingsor retro-fitting accessories will increase theweight of the vehicle ››› .

WARNING

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Always adjust your speed and driving

style to suit road conditions and require-ments.

● Never exceed the gross axle weight ratingor the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-missible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving characteris-tics of the vehicle may change, which couldlead to accidents, injuries and damage to thevehicle.


Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be differentin other countries. All data in the official vehi-cle documentation takes precedence overthese data at all times ››› .

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on theball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-ceed 50 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor, if the drawbarload is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING

● For safety reasons, you should not drive atspeeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towinga trailer. This also applies in countries wherehigher speeds are permitted.

● Never exceed the maximum trailer weightsor the drawbar load. If the permissible axleload or the permissible total weight is excee-ded, the driving characteristics of the vehiclemay change, leading to accidents, injuriesand damage to the vehicle.

223

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheelbolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.The tyre pressure values given there are forcold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raisedpressures of warm tyres ››› .

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summertyres.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the frontwheels.

Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too

low, there is an increased danger of accidents- particularly at high speeds.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts andthreads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your TechnicalService for information about appropriatewheel, tyre and snow chain size.

224


Engine data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

66 (90)/4,400-5,400 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Performance Ecomotive

Top speed (km/h) 186 (5) 186 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3


Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,616 1,625

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,156 1,165

Gross front axle weight 820 820

Gross rear axle weight 830 830

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 570 580

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,000 1,000

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 900 900

225

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data





Performancemanual

manualEcomotive

Top speed (km/h) 200 (5) 200 (5)



Weights (in kg)










226


Petrol engine 1.6 81 kW (110 PS)


81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)


Performance manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 191 (5) 191 (6)



Weights (in kg)










227

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data






Top speed (km/h) 208 (6) 208 (6)


Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9 9

Weights (in kg)










228


Diesel Engine 1.4 CR 66 kW (90 PS)


66 (90)/3,500 230/1,750-2,500 4/1,422Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Performance manual manualEcomotive

automaticEcomotive

Top speed (km/h) 185 (5) 185 (5) 185 (7)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8 8.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.7 11.7 11.8

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,694 1,694 1,715

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,234 1,234 1,255

Gross front axle weight 890 890 910

Gross rear axle weight 840 840 840

Permitted roof load 75 75 75


Trailer without brakes 610 610 620

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,100 1,100 1,100

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000 1,000

229

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Diesel Engine 1.6 CR 85 kW (115 PS)


85 (115)/3,500-4,000 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,598Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ


Top speed (km/h) 201 (5) 201 (5)


Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10 10

Weights (in kg)










230


Dimensions

Fig. 218 Dimensions

TOLEDO

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 876/1,004

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,602

D Length (mm) 4,482

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,463/1,500

G Width (mm) 1,715

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,466

Turning radius (m) 10.2

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

231

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Index

Index

AABS

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155see also Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . 154, 155

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 192additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro-

gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Adjusting

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Adjusting the head restraints

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Adjustment

CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Air-conditioning

economic use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 66

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 69functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 37air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Alternator

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 155Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 76Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 76

Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Armrest

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Aspects to take into account before starting the

vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55ASR

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156see also Traction control system . . . . . . 154, 156

Assistance systemsABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 176parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Audible signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Audible warning signal

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Automatic air conditioningclimatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Automatic car washessee Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Automatic gearboxbackup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 35parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 159

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

BBack seat

folding down and raising the back seat back-rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Ball couplingdisassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Blown bulbs

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 205

opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

233

Index

Boothook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139retaining elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139retaining nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Brakes

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Braking

brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Bulb failure

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

CCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Care of vehicle

door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108individualised settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108locking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Changing bulbs

daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Changing bulbs on the number plate . . . . . . . . . . 91removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Changing bulbs on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 88fitting the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88removing the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Changing lights on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Changing oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Changing rear lights on the rear lid

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90fitting the bulb-holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Changing settingsCAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Changing tail lights (on the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . 89Changing the bulbs

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Changing the rear lights on the rear lid

removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Checking levelsengine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Child-proof locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Child seatCategorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 74ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 73securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

chromed parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Cleaning and thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148blower selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Closing

central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108vehicle with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Coming Home and Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

234

Index

Coming Home and Leaving Home Function . . . . 121Control and warning lamps

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Controls and displaysGeneral instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Controls on the steering wheelOperating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101operating the telephone and audio system . . 102

Cooling systemChecking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208engine coolant temperature display . . . . . . . . . 97topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Correct sitting position

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 174adjusting the stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175temporary deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175turning off the cruise control system . . . . . . . 176

DDamage to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 14Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 71Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Diesel

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Diesel particulate filtermalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95Disposal

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Doors

Child-proof locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Drink holdercentre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Driversee Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58

Driver information systemCD/radio indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . 23

Driving abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 223Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 99Economical

driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . 154, 156Efficiency programme

additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 28saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 115Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 156Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 150Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 160bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 50hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Emergencyfuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Emergency operationFront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Emission control systemcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

235

Index

starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Engine and ignitionstarting the engine with Keyless Access . . . . . 151

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 202, 205battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Engine fault

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 205

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 208Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Environmentecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 192ESC

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Exhaust gas purification system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Extendingthe luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Exterior lightingChange a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Exterior mirrorsadjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

FFastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Filling up the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Front Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Front Assist

City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 180malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179see also Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . 176

Front Assist monitoring systemmalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 180radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Front Assist Monitoring Systemswitching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Front passenger front airbagcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Front seatheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201fuel level gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Fuel consumptionSwitching off using inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 164

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

236

Index

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82in the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

GGauge

fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35engaging the gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . 156manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 159General instrument panel

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

GRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174see also Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154Hand brake

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 121HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Head-protection airbagsdescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38HHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Hill hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

IIdentifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 149, 151Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 149, 151Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 158service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 26

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205instrument panel

service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Interior

lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Interior view

left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

237

Index

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

KKey-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Keyless Access

go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Keyless-Go ignition push button needs to be

pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 110

Keyless Access lock and ignition system:see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Keysremote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

LLever

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 116

automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . 119change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83coming home and Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . 121control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120front fog lights with cornering function . . . . . 120glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121parking lights on both sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120rear interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Lockingcentral locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Locking and unlockingin the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 10Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Category N1 vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123net pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Mmaintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205malfunction

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Malfunction

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164front assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Manual air conditioningair recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Manual air conditioning manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Manual gearbox

gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Mirror

vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Multimedia compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

NNet pocket

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

OOctane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 97

Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40On-screen messages of the instrument panel

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

238

Index

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199vehicle, with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 10tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Opening manuallyrear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

PPaint

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

PaintworkCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Parking Aidadjusting the display and audible warnings . 171automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168

ParkPilotsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168

Particulate filtercontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . . . 63Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Pre-heating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

RRadar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 114

see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 113Rear lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Rear seat passengers

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Rear view mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Rear view mirrors

adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Rear window wiper blade

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199opening tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Rims

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

239

Index

Roll-back functionwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Rubber sealscare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Run-innew engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215the first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Running inbrake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

SSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 14Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safety instructions

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 73

Safety notesSeat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 28Seat belt position

for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 65Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Selector lever

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69see also Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 224Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Start-Stop

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Start-Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 152Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Steeringsteering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Steering wheeladjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Storage

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135in front door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136in the centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Switching off the engine

with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . 149System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

TTailgate locking time extension

see Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221temperature display

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Temperature display

outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Temperature selection

heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

240

Index

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 157, 159Tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188correct placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184use and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Transporting items

carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Tyre Mobility SetInflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Tyre pressure monitoring

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Tyre Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Tyre repair kit

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 49with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

UUnfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Unlocking

central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

VVehicle

chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 110

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 211assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51automatic disconnection of electrical equip-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214checking electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 211disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31lifting the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Vehicle carecar wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194cleaning of chromed parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197high-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194paint polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195wheel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 53

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow systemactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 75Vehicle underbody

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

241

Index

WWarning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 98

ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 165hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150pressing the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Warning and control lightsESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98break recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97deactivation of the airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164disabling airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98gearbox malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Warning symbolssee Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Washing

by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194with high-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Washing the vehiclethings to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Wheel

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47loosening and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 224

anti-theft bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49, 75cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Wheel trimremoving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Windowselectric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 115removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Windscreen washer fluid

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Windscreen washer water

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Windscreen wiperjets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 124control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125lifting the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Winter conditionsbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Winters conditionsthawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Winter servicebattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213disconnecting and connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Wipe interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

242

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.16

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the TOLEDO, some of the equipment and func-tions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the mar-ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.


Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

OWNER’S MANUAL

Toledo

6JA012720BF

Ingl

és 6

JA01

2720

BF

(05

.16)

Tole

do

Ingl

és (

05.1

6)

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

owner’s manual - seat uk...owner’s manual toledo 6ja012720bf inglés 6ja012720bf (05.16) toledo...

Documents